JP6527404B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention executes a variable display game based on winning of the game ball in the start-up winning area, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the stop result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined special result. It relates to the game machine which makes

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that stores starting memory based on winning of a gaming ball in a starting winning area and displays a holding mark corresponding to the starting memory on a display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2000-135332

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the interest of the game can not be enhanced.
Therefore, the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
A game machine which executes a variable display game based on winning of a game ball in a start winning area, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when a stop result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined special result. ,
Start winning storage means for extracting random numbers related to the execution of the variable display game based on winning of the game ball in the start winning area, and storing the right to execute the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number;
A prior determination unit that determines the right to execute the variable display game before the variable display game is executed;
Production control means for displaying an effect display corresponding to the variable display game on a display device and displaying an execution right display corresponding to the execution right on a predetermined display unit of the display device;
Specific effect period setting means capable of setting a specific effect period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the number of execution rights stored in the start winning memory storage means reaches the predetermined upper limit number; Equipped with
The effect control means is
With the start of the specific effect period, it is possible to change the display mode of the effect display and the display mode of the execution right display from the normal display mode to a specific display mode different from the normal display mode.
Based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, when to terminate the specific effect period, for the effect display displays changed to the normal display mode, it takes over the particular display mode for the execution rights expression It is possible to display in.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display. It is a figure explaining the detail of an information display device. It is a figure explaining the detail of an effect operation part. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining a common drawing change display game. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. It is a flow chart explaining special processing usual processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting process (special figure 1) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing (special figure 2) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing during a special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining high probability change frequency number update processing. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special winning opening open. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 2 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 2. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 2; (A) is a flowchart explaining the small hit fanfare medium process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the small hit medium process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart explaining small hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing, (b) is a flow chart explaining small hitting end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 3; It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flowchart explaining distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "effect point control" and "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control." It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control." It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control." It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control." It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control." It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control." It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "watch character feature presentation." It is a figure explaining an example of "a certainty / small hit production". It is a figure explaining an example of "a certainty / small hit production". It is a figure explaining an example of "a certainty / small hit production". It is a figure explaining an example of "a certainty / small hit production". It is a figure explaining an example of "a certainty / small hit production". It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flow chart explaining production point control processing. It is a flow chart explaining stage change control processing. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading change system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining a modification of processing under special view display. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3. It is a front view of the game board with which the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment is provided. It is explanatory drawing regarding a prize-winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing regarding a prize-winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing regarding a prize-winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing regarding a prize-winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing regarding a prize-winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing regarding a prize-winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing regarding a prize-winning apparatus. It is explanatory drawing regarding a back surface structural member. It is explanatory drawing regarding a back surface structural member. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is explanatory drawing regarding an upper rose unit. It is an explanatory view about a usual change winning a prize device. It is an explanatory view about a usual change winning a prize device. It is an explanatory view about a usual change winning a prize device. It is an explanatory view about a usual change winning a prize device. It is an explanatory view about a usual change winning a prize device. It is a flow chart explaining special map reservation information judging processing of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the effect control device of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the presentation point control processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining a specific presentation zone setting process. It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control." It is a figure explaining an example of "specific production zone control."

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, on the upper part of the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor inside and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided. In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 which incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or effect, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effect). There is. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Furthermore, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a rendering operation unit 550 for receiving an operation input from the player is provided. The effect operation unit 550 is the effect button 25 incorporating the effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 contacts the player A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key 26 for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  In addition, on the front of the glass frame 15 above the upper tray 21, a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card being ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine A discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, by the player operating the effect operation unit 550, in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect such as causing the player's operation to intervene is performed. Can.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.2 and FIG.3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 is provided at the upper, left, right, and lower portions of the center case 40 to perform game effects by operating. The panel effect device (first movable effect member) 44a provided at the upper portion of the center case 40 is capable of sliding movement operation (falling operation) from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41. It is possible to rotate. Further, the panel effect devices (second movable effect members) 44b and 44c provided on the left and right portions of the center case 40 can perform a slide movement operation from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41. It has become. Further, a board effect device (third movable effect member) 44d provided at the lower part of the center case 40 is a movable effect member imitating a clock, and is a turn from the state shown in FIG. 3 to the state shown in FIG. While being able to perform a moving operation (stand-up operation), it is also possible to perform a rotating operation to rotate a needle provided to the board effect device 44d.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common view variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 9).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 9).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 9).
In addition, it changes to the central starting winning opening 36 provided separately from the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and is provided with a starting winning device having a distributing member inside, and the starting opening switch of the special figure 1, 2 in the starting winning device. (The starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a) may be provided to make winnings alternately. In this case, the special figure variation display game is not a special figure 2 priority process but a winning order order game. Furthermore, a general drawing gate switch (gate switch 34a) may be disposed in the start winning device, and special drawing 1 start winning, special drawing 2 starting winning, and common drawing gate passage may be sequentially generated. In this case, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is also provided, for example, below the starting winning device. Then, instead of the normal drawing, the common drawing may be generated at a predetermined rate, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be opened.

Further, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a normal change winning device 37 (a second start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view variable display game is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the gaming ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and a partition 37d for regulating the flow of gaming ball ing. The movable member 37b always stands upright so as to keep the distance from the partition 37d equal to or less than the diameter of the gaming ball, that is, the closed state (convenient for the player) in which the gaming ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 9) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 9).
Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a winning opening and the like.

Furthermore, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 which can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept There is.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the big winning opening (blocked state which is disadvantageous for the player) is converted into the opened state (which is advantageous for the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by, for example, a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 9) as a drive device. During the state, the game ball is made easy to flow into the big winning hole by converting the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). It has become. In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 9) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the gaming balls having flowed into the large winning openings are detected by any of the large winning openings switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of large winning opening switch 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning in the start winning opening 36 and fires the game ball to the right side game area (so-called It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by right-handing.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warp device 42 is provided on the left portion of the center case 40. The warp device 42 has an inlet 42a opened to the left for receiving gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 outside the center case 40, and a tubular shape for guiding the gaming balls flowing into the inlet 42a to the stage 42b. The gaming ball having the warp flow path and flowing down the warp flow path is guided to the left end of the stage 42b.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the collective display device 50 is a special view 1 display for the first special view variation display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like as shown in FIG. Fluctuation display part) 51a (D1) and the special figure 2 display (the second special figure fluctuation display part) 51b (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and a common drawing fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps Variable display unit 52 (common view display unit) 52 (D10, D18), and storage display units 53, 54, 55 (D11 to D16) for informing the starting memory number of each variable display game similarly formed of LED lamps. Equipped with

  In addition, a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator, right strike notification unit) 56 (D8) that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state is more advantageous to hit the right than to hit the left. ), A second gaming status display unit (second gaming status indicator, time saving status notification unit) 57 (D9) that lights up when time saving status occurs and notifies time saving status occurrence; probability of big hit when the gaming machine 10 is powered on The third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) 58 (D17) indicating that the state is a high probability state, the number of rounds at the big hit (opening and closing of the special fluctuation winning device 38 A round display unit 59 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of times is provided. The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies of the occurrence of the big hit.

  The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51a and the special view 2 display 51b is, for example, while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. As shown in (b) and FIG. 6 (b), the central segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is moving. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51a, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), in addition to the center segment, it is provided on the lower side of 7 segments rightward The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is changing, and it is configured to be able to distinguish between the special view 1 and the special view 2. Then, when the result of the game is "detachment", for example, the central segment (in addition to the special segment 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on as a result mode of the declination, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", as shown in FIG. 5 (c) and FIG. 6 (c), a result aspect (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result aspect of outliers is lit as the result aspect (special result aspect) of the hit. And display the game results.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 6A, the 16R normal big hit and the 16R positive variation A1 big hit which is the big hit in the odd symbol, and the big hit in the non positive symbol There are 5 types of big hit of 2R positive variation big hit and 16R positive variation A2a big hit and 16R positive variation A2b big hit. The probability of becoming a big hit result of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 big hit probability) is “50/100” in the case of 16R normal big hit, “5/100” in the case of 16 R probability variation A1 big hit, 16 R In the case of the probability variation A2a big hit, it is "2/100", in the case of the 16R probability variation A2b big hit, it is "2/100", and in the case of the 2R probability variation big hit, it is "41/100". Also, the probability of becoming a big hit result of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 big hit probability) is “50/100” in the case of 16R normal big hit, and “39/100” in the case of 16R positive variation A1 big hit In the case of 16R probability variation A2a big hit, it is "1/100", in the case of 16R probability variation A2b big hit, it is "1/100", and in the case of 2R probability variation big hit, it is "9/100".
In this embodiment, the 16R probability variation A2b big hit is the same mode (playing status) as the 16R regular big hit after the end of the special gaming status, so the 16R regular big hit and the 16R positive variation A2b big hit are after the special gaming status In the time saving state, the same variation pattern table is used up to a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of Special Figure 1, as shown in FIG. 5C, two result modes are set respectively as the result mode for 16R positive variation A2a big hit and the result mode for 16R positive variation A2a big hit However, three or more result modes may be set. Further, in the case of Special Figure 2, as shown in FIG. 6C, one result mode is set as the result mode for the 16R positive variation A2a big hit and the one result result for the 16R positive variation A2a big hit, The result mode of may be set.
Moreover, it is preferable that the 2R probability variation big hit outcome mode and the small hit outcome mode are difficult to distinguish.

  The common indicator 52 blinks the lamp during fluctuation to indicate that it is fluctuating, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the game result. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the symbol number for variation is “0” out of the lamps D10 and D18 constituting the common view display 52 (that is, the game result is lost) ), Only the lamp D10 is turned on, and only the lamp D18 is turned on when the variation symbol number is “1” (ie, the game result is hit and the stop symbol number is “1”). When the variation symbol number is "2" (ie, when the game result is hit and the stop symbol number is "2"), both the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are turned on.

  Further, the common drawing suspension display 55 displays the number of start memories (= the number of holdings) of the common drawing start gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 52 by turning off, blinking and lighting a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4C, of the lamps D15 and D16 that constitute the common view reservation display 55, when the number of reservations is "0", both the lamps D15 and D16 are selected. When the number of reservations is "1", only the lamp D15 is turned on. When the number of reservations is "2", both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on. When the number of reservations is "3" Is configured to turn on the lamp D15 and turn on the lamp D16, and to turn on both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 when the number of reservations is "4". The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

  The special figure 1 reserve display 53 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of first start memories (special figure 1 reserve) which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51a. Displayed by blinking or lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, of the lamps D11 and D12 constituting the special view 1 suspension display 53, when the number of special view start memories is “0”, the lamp D11 and When both lamps D12 are turned off, and when the number of start memories is "1", only lamp D11 is turned on. When the number of start memories is "2", both lamps D11 and D12 are turned off. The lamp D11 is turned on and the lamp D12 is turned on when the number of start memories is "3", and the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are set when the number of start memories is "4". Is configured to cause both sides to blink. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

  The special figure 2 reserve display 54 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of second start memories (special figure 2 reserve) which is the right to execute the second special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 51 b. , Blink, display by lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, of the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special view 2 suspension display 54, when the number of special view 2 start memories is “0”, the lamp D13 and When both lamps D14 are turned off, and when the number of starting memories is "1", only lamp D13 is lit, and when the number of starting memories is "2", both lamps D13 and D14 are turned off. Is turned on, the lamp D13 is turned on and the lamp D14 is turned on when the number of start memories in the special view 2 is "3", and the number of lights stored in the start table is "4", the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on. Is configured to cause both sides to blink. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

  The first gaming state display unit (right hitting notification unit) 56 is composed of an LED lamp etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 4 (f), the gaming condition in which the left hitting is more advantageous than the right hitting (normal hitting state In the case of), the lamp is turned off, and in the gaming state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting (right hitting), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (time reduction state notification unit) 57 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, in the normal game state where time reduction state is not occurring (variation time reduction The lamp is turned off when the function is not operating), and is turned on when the time-shortening state is occurring (during the fluctuation time shortening function is activated).

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 58 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is the high probability state (probable change state) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 59 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, for example, turns off the lamp when not in the special game state based on the jackpot, and corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on the lamp. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4E, when the selected number of rounds is "16" among the lamps D3 to D7 constituting the round display unit 59, the lamps D3, D5, and D7 are lit. In the state, when the number of rounds selected is "2", the lamps D4 and D6 are configured to be in the lighting state. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, in the lower right part of the center case 40, a display of a fourth symbol for executing the decoration special view fluctuation display game separately from the decoration special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 An information display device 60 is provided to display the number of starting memories.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the information display device 60 is configured of six LED lamps and the like. As shown in FIG. 7 (b), of the lamps L1 to L6 constituting the information display device 60, the lamp L1 is a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special view fluctuation display game It is special figure 1 fourth symbol LED which displays. In addition, the lamp L2 is a special figure 2 fourth pattern LED for displaying a fourth figure for executing the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. Further, the lamps L3 and L4 are special figure 1 holding LEDs 1 and 2 for displaying the first start memory number, and the lamps L5 and L6 are special figure 2 holding LEDs 1 and 2 for displaying the second starting memory number.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (d), the lamps L1 and L2 blink the LED while the corresponding special figure variation display game is fluctuating to indicate that the variation is in progress, and the special figure variation display game is ended. The game result is displayed as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result. In the case of the present embodiment, the light is turned off if it is out of place, and it is turned on if it is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, the display mode in the case of the small hit may be a display mode different from the removal or the big hit. For example, you may make it blink in the aspect different from the blink in fluctuation | variation. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 200 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (e), the lamps L3 and L4 are the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game displayed on the special view 1 display 51a. The number of LEDs is displayed by turning off, blinking, and lighting the multiple LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, both the lamp L3 and the lamp L4 are turned off when the number of special view 1 start memories is "0", and only the lamp L3 is turned on when the number of special views start memory is "1". When the number of start memory numbers is “2”, both the lamp L3 and the lamp L4 are turned on. When the number of start memory numbers is “3”, the lamp L3 is turned on and the lamp L4 is turned on. When the number of start memories is "4", both the lamp L3 and the lamp L4 are set to blink. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 200 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (e), the lamps L5 and L6 are the second start storage (special figure 2 hold) which is the right to execute the second special figure variation display game displayed on the special view 2 display 51b. The number of LEDs is displayed by turning off, blinking, and lighting the multiple LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, both the lamp L5 and the lamp L6 are turned off when the number of start-up memories of Special Figure 2 is "0", and only the lamp L5 is turned on when the number of start-up memories is "1". If the number of start memory is 2 and both the lamp L5 and the lamp L6 are on, and if the number of start memory 2 is 3, the lamp L5 is set to blink and the lamp L6 is turned on. When the number of start memories is "4", both the lamp L5 and the lamp L6 are set to blink. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 200 ms.

  Note that the brightness of the information display device 60 may be adjusted so as not to affect the game. As a method of adjusting the luminance, a method of decreasing a current value supplied to the LED by a resistor, a method of adjusting by software control such as PWM control, a method of using both of them, and the like can be mentioned.

By providing the information display device 60 separately from the display device 41, it is possible to effectively utilize the display region without occupying the display region of the display device 41 by the display of the fourth symbol. In the case where a movable effect member or the like is provided, the information display device 60 is not positioned at the operating range of the movable effect member so that the information display device 60 is not covered in the process of operation. Deploy. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed not on the information display device 60 but on the display device 41. In this case, the fourth symbol is displayed at a position not concealed by the effect member or the like to be always visible. Also, when a movable effect member or the like is provided, the fourth symbol may not be covered in the process of operation, so that it may be displayed at a position that does not fall within the operation range of the movable effect member, or By moving to a position outside the operating range according to the operation of the member, it is always visible.
In addition to displaying the number of stored special drawing start memories with the lamps L3 and L4 and the lamps L5 and L6 of the information display device 60, the display device 41 also displays it as a decorative special drawing start memory display. The device 41 may display a numeral display representing the number of stored special drawing start memories. Moreover, it is also possible to keep displaying the said number display on a part (for example, corner) of the display area of the display apparatus 41, even when decoration special drawing start memory display can not be displayed by effect etc.

  The details of the effect operation unit 550 are shown in FIG. FIG. 8A is a plan view of the effect operation unit 550. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment is configured to include an effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. It is done. That is, the effect operation unit 550 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to the physical push button function.

  Then, sensitivity setting data and LED brightness data are transmitted from the effect control board (effect control device) 300 to the effect operation unit 550, and from the effect operation portion 550 to the effect control board (effect control device) 300, an effect button The push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the (push button) 25 and the touch ON / OFF signal (contact / non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a included in the touch panel 29 are output It is configured to be

  In the case of the present embodiment, a pressing operation on the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 550 (a pressing operation of pushing the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 550 and pressing down the rendering operation unit 550) by the presentation button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the presentation button (push button) 25 ) To detect. A plurality of points are provided on the top surface of the effect operation unit 550, and a touch sensor provided on the touch panel 29 detects a touch operation on the points provided on the top surface of the effect operation unit 550.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, nine points “TSW1” to “TSW8” and “Pa” are provided as the plurality of points. More specifically, the "TSW4" point provided at the center of the top surface of the effect operation unit 550, the "TSW1" point provided to the left of the "TSW4" point, and the back side of the "TSW4" point The "TSW3" point provided on the board 30 side, the "TSW6" point provided on the right of the "TSW4" point, and the "TSW8" provided on the near side (player's side) of the "TSW4" point Point, "TSW2" point provided between "TSW1" point and "TSW3" point, "TSW5" point provided between "TSW3" point and "TSW6" point, and "TSW6" Between the "TSW7" point provided between the point and the "TSW8" point, and between the "TSW8" point and the "TSW1" point And "Pa" point, which is provided, is provided. The number of points is not limited to nine and can be arbitrarily changed. Further, in FIG. 8B, for convenience, each point of “TSW1” to “TSW8” is described as “TSW1” to “TSW8”, however, in the rendering operation unit 550 of this embodiment, FIG. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

  The points at which a touch operation can be detected by the touch sensor of the touch panel 29 are eight points of “TSW1” to “TSW8” points, and the touch operation is not detected at the “Pa” point. Of course, the touch operation may be detected even at the “Pa” point. In addition, at each of nine points “TSW1” to “TSW8” points and “Pa” points, LEDs (systems of full color in the case of the present embodiment) of independent systems are arranged.

  The “Pa” point is, for example, using the “Pa” point LED as a notification lamp for one-shot notification, or sequentially turning on the LED at each point on the top of the effect operation unit 550 like a roulette “Pa” point It can be used for the production of a definite system, such as using the LED of the “the exact (or definite variation confirmed)” point, and using the “Pa” point the LED for the accurate pre-reading.

  Here, the lighting brightness of the LED for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (specifically, the LED disposed at the “TSW1” to “TSW8” point, “Pa” point, etc.) is adjusted to the brightness (hall setting) , And player adjustment) are excluded from the subject. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is constant without being affected by the brightness adjustment. In addition, the touch sensor has a function of forcibly turning off the touch when the touch on state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)). Has a function of outputting a signal. That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured to be unable to detect a continuous touch operation for a predetermined time or more.

  Examples of the player's operation detected by the effect operation unit 550 include the operation shown in FIG. 8C. The “single hit” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 once, and the “continuous hit” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 a plurality of times at intervals within a predetermined time. The “long press” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 for a predetermined time or more, and the “touch” is an operation of touching the touch panel 29. "" Pa "operation (TSW1 or 8) + long press" is in contact with one or both of "Pa" point or two points "TSW1" point and "TSW8" point adjacent to it. “Flick” is an operation of sliding so that the user touches the touch panel 29 while the user is touching it. Of course, the operation to be detected is not limited to these operations.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. And, when the game ball wins the general winning a prize opening 35, the starting winning a prize opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 or the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38, the prize balls of the number according to the kind of the winning a prize opening won out From the dispensing unit controlled according to FIG. 9), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23.

  On the other hand, in the common view start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 9) comprising a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting gaming balls having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided. When the gaming ball driven into the area 32 passes through the common drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the common drawing variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, a state in which the common drawing fluctuation display game is already played and the common drawing fluctuation display game is not ended, or the common drawing fluctuation display game hits When 37 is converted to the open state and the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing start memory number is added if the common drawing start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) By 1), one common figure starting memory is stored. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 55 of the batch display device 50. Further, a random number value (hit random number value) for hit determination for determining the result of the common pattern variation display game is stored in the common drawing start memory, and the hit random number value is determined as the hit value. And determine the result of the general drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  The common drawing variation display game is provided on the collective display device 50, and is displayed on the fluctuation display unit (general drawing indicator) 52 configured by the LED, and the lighting mode and lighting color of this LED are ordinary Make identification information (general drawing, normal symbol). Note that the general-purpose display 52 is configured as a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may. If the stop display of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a common drawing specification result, it becomes a hit of the common drawing, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened for a predetermined time. Thereby, the game ball easily wins the second starting winning opening inside the normal variation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special view variation display game is executed increases.

  The winning balls to the start winning hole 36 and the winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the start hole 1 switch 36a and the start hole 2 switch 37a provided therein. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the first special view variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as a limit. The game ball that has won a prize to the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special view variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition, when the start winning ball is detected, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively, and the extracted random value is within the gaming control device 100 (see FIG. 9). The special map storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special map start storage within a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). Then, the number of storages of this special view start storage is displayed on the storage display unit (special view 1 suspension display 53, special view 2 suspension display 54) for the start winning number notification of the collective display device 50 and the center The display device 41 of the case 40 is also displayed as a decorative special view start memory display.

  The game control device 100 is a special figure 1 display 51a (variation display device) or a special view 2 display 51b (variation display) based on winning on the start winning hole 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, or their start memory. Device) to play the first or second special view variable display game. The first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figure, identification information) and then displaying a predetermined result mode as a stop. Further, a decorative special-figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device (image display device) 41 is executed. Then, when the display mode of the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b becomes the special result mode (special result) as a result of the special view variation display game, it becomes a big hit and the special gaming state ( It becomes so-called, the big hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode. In addition, when the display mode of the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b is a small hit result mode as a result of the special view fluctuation display game, the small hit becomes a small hit small game state (so-called , Small hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a small hit result mode.

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, while performing the variable display game by the decoration special symbol corresponding to the special drawing start memory number, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  The special view 1 display 51 a and the special view 2 display 51 b may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 a and the special view 2 display 51 b in the gaming machine 10. In addition, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special view change display game and the second special view change display game, and the special view change display game can be executed, the second special view change display game is It is to be executed (prioritized).

  In addition, in the state where the first special view variation display game (the second special view variation display game) can be started, and the number of starting memories is 0, the starting winning opening 36 (or the normal variation winning device 37) When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored along with the generation of the start right, and the number of start memories is incremented by one, and based on the start memory, the first special view fluctuation display game (second special drawing The variable display game is started, and at this time, the number of starting memories is decremented by one. On the other hand, the first special view variation display game (second special view variation display game) can not be started immediately, for example, the first or second special view variation display game is already played, and the special view variation display game is ended. If the number of starting memories is less than the upper limit number when the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation winning device 37) in the non-playing state, the special gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The number of starting memories is incremented by one and one starting memory is stored. Then, when the number of starting memories becomes 1 or more, the first special view variation display game (the second special view variation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special view variation display game or the special gaming state, When the small hit gaming state ends), the number of starting memories is decremented by one, and the first special view variation display game (second special view variation display game) is started based on the stored starting storage. In the following description, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch A noncontact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used in 38a that has a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. ing. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) and Special 3 reach (SP3 reach) are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit) of the special view variation display game or a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special view variation display game as the current gaming state. Condition), the operation condition (time-saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the drawing start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123 . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame rendering device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in the table to determine the hit-off of the common drawing fluctuation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the regular drawing display 52, processing is performed to display a regular drawing fluctuation display game which is stopped and displayed. If the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit, the common drawing display 52 displays special result modes corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol, and the common current solenoid 37c is displayed. In operation, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing display 52.

  In addition, starting winning combination (starting memory) is remembered on the basis of the input of detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 1 switch 36a which is equipped in starting winning a prize opening 36, on the basis of this starting memory, the 1st special figure fluctuation indicatory game The jackpot determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit of the first special view fluctuation display game. The memory for starting is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and based on the memory for starting, for the big hit judgment of the second special view fluctuation display game The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (rendering control command) including the determination result of the first special view variation display game or the second special view variation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b, processing is performed to display a special view fluctuation display game in which the stop display is performed. In other words, the game control means performs game progression control of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 I

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The CPU 111A of the game control apparatus 100 displays the special result mode or the small hit result mode on the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b when the result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit. At the same time, the special game state and the small hit game state are generated. In the processing to generate the special gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A opens the opening and closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and can flow the gaming ball into the large winning opening. And control. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51a or the special figure 2 display 51b.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (a specific game state, a common drawing high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the probability (the probability per common drawing) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (generally drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) It is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11A, for example, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment is a movable member when the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the normal gaming state (generally low drawing probability state). If the probability per spread is set to "0/251" so as not to open the 37b and the gaming state at the start of the change is the probability of high spread, the probability per spread is "250/251". It is set to.
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 11B, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is the case where the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the normal gaming state (general drawing low probability state) This is the same as in the case of the short time state (general drawing high probability state). For example, when "fluctuation pattern 1" is selected as the common drawing fluctuation pattern, "500 ms" is selected and "fluctuation pattern 2" is selected. In the case where the "variation pattern 3" is selected, "1500 ms" is set, and when "variation pattern 3" is selected, "3000 ms" is set. In addition, the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is the same for the normal gaming state (general drawing low probability state) and the short time state (general drawing high probability state), For example, "600 msec" is set.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 11C, “variation pattern 1” is selected with the probability of “198/256” as the common drawing fluctuation pattern, and “variation pattern 2” is selected with the probability of “32/256”. “Variation pattern 3” is selected with the probability of “26/256”. It should be noted that since the probability per common drawing in the common drawing low probability state is 0, that is, the hit is not selected when the common drawing low probability state is, "hit" in "low probability state (general drawing low probability state)" It does not correspond to Therefore, in FIG. 11C, it is "x".
And, in the case of this embodiment, it is configured to determine hit / miss, common drawing stop symbol, common drawing change time with reference to the game state at the start of change (at the start of common drawing change display game) There is. In addition, even if the game state changes during execution (during variation) of the common view variation display game, it does not affect the hit / disengagement of the game being executed, the common view stop symbol, and the common view variation time. It is configured.

Also, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern (common electric power opening pattern) when the common game fluctuation display game hits and results in opening the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is determined when the symbol is determined (when the common drawing stop symbol is determined) For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), the common power release pattern is determined when the gaming state at the time of symbol determination is the normal gaming state (generally low probability state). This is the same as when the time saving state (general drawing high probability state) is the same, for example, when the variation symbol number is “1”, “open pattern A” is selected and the variation symbol number is “2”. “Open pattern B” is selected. For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (e), when "open pattern A" is selected, the open time (general power open time) becomes 1000 ms and the number of open times (general power open number) becomes 3 times. When "open pattern B" is selected, the open time (general power open time) is set to 2400 ms, and the open number (generally open number) is set to 2 times.
And, even if the game state changes during execution of the general power release operation, it is configured not to affect the general power release pattern of the operation being executed.
In addition, although the probability of hitting a drawing is 0 in the state of drawing a low probability, if a reference is required (for example, the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation (ie, the gaming state when deciding a hit / drop) is In the figure high probability state, when the gaming state at the time of symbol determination (the gaming state when determining the common use release pattern) is the common drawing low probability state), the same pattern as the common drawing high probability state It is configured to It should be noted that although the probability of per common drawing in the state of common low probability is 0, the hit / drop is determined with reference to the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation, and the common power release pattern is referred to the gaming state when the symbol is determined If it is determined that the game state when determining the hit / release is the common view high probability state and the game state when the common use release pattern is determined is the common view low probability state, “ Even in the low probability state (generally low probability state), it may correspond to “per 1” or “per 2”. Therefore, it does not become "x" in FIG.11 (d).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (E.g., 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability (the probability per common drawing) to be hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 0/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a high probability (generally high probability state, eg 250/251).

  In the time reduction state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power open times, the common power open time and the common drawing probability Make the time for state change longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, after the process for inhibiting an interrupt (step S1) is first performed, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check (step S8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). If it is (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 13 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  In addition, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 13 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  In step S21 of FIG. 13, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. Further, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error display provided in the collective display device 50, for example) Device) on (lit) in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25), step S31 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command (a command for a customer waiting demo screen when waiting for a customer, other than that If so, a plurality of commands such as a recovery screen command are sent. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying a predetermined time ( For example, for 30 seconds, a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of the RAM initialization with light and sound are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the common drawing (hit random number), RWM specified as the initial value (start value) of the random number to determine the hit symbol of the common drawing (hit symbol random number) After saving in the area (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured as. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method of changing the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S36) It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in step S35 described above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting the interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), and then a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a of common drawing, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 38a, monitoring of error ( A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are open. In addition, special figure game processing (step S109) which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game and common drawing game processing (step S110) which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is performed.

Next, segment LED editing processing (step S111) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S111) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S114), and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the figure variation display game.

  Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hitting middle process (step A16) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing, etc. .
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle process, a small hit end process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the above.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51a (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) according to the special view 1 display 51a is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 51b (step A21), the symbol variation control processing (step A22) concerning the special figure 2 display 51b is performed, and the special figure game processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. (1) It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player strikes the left at the first starting opening (start winning opening 36), and does not win the prize unless the player normally strikes the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the first start port (start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A109), perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A110), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting opening It determines (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is done, it ends starting opening switch supervision processing. If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, there is no winning information on the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37). The setting is made (step A121), and it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), hard random number acquisition processing finish.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the special view starting opening switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is Load the starting opening signal output count which is the number of outputs to the external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133) ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start aperture signal output number area of RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of specially-designated 1 reservations or specially-designated number 2) is updated +1 Step A136) Save the target starting opening winning flag (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special views reserved is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a winning on the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the first starting opening has been won (step A142; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A143), RWM small hit symbols It saves in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure holding information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special view reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and execute the special view start aperture switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the start winning area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit as start storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 19, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (the starting winning opening 36) (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that a winning on the first starting opening has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether the special drawing time is short (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small hit (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit (step A153; Y), the processing for determining the special map hold information ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step A156), and correspond to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that it is not a winning on the first starting opening (step A158; N), stop symbol information of the release is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first starting opening has been won (step A158; Y), the big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not A small hit determination process (step A159) to determine whether or not to perform. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 It acquires (step A162), and it transfers to the process of step A164.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A 167).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A168), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A <b> 169) The special-image hold information determination process ends. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Etc.) make a pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A201). . When the special winning opening open process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).
If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, the small hit is being processed (step A203). ).
If the small hit is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hit is not being processed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special process game processing number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204).
Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

If the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (step A 204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If the small hit residual sphere process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.
Then, "0" is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 38a) (step A206).

  If there is no input on the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input on the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 38a) (step A210). When the special winning opening switch 1 has an input (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 38a) (step A210).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When the special winning opening switch 2 has an input (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and effect command setting processing (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A268), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215).
When the special winning opening residual ball processing is under (step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening residual ball processing is not under (step A215; N), the small hitting residual ball processing It is determined whether it is medium (step A216).
If small ball remaining ball processing is being performed (step A 216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and if small ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A 216; N), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (step A217), and it is determined whether the special winning opening count has reached the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (step A 218).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special view game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220) It is determined whether the small hit is being processed (step A221). If the small hit is not under process (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished, and if the small hit is under processing (step A221; Y), the big hit opening control pointer area is small hit. The value of the opening operation end is saved (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special view 2 reservation number (second start storage number) is "0" (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo is started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step A311) A311; N) sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), rendering command setting processing (step A314) is performed, special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and special processing normal processing is ended. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has been started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step A301 (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number A reserve number command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing of special drawing 2 (step A305) is performed, and the special drawing processing is ended.
Also, if the special drawing 1 reservation number is not "0" at step A306 (step A306; N), the special drawing 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special drawing corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number A number-of-holds command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing 1 of special drawing 1 (step A310) is performed, and the special drawing routine processing is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is performed when the special figure 2 pending number is not “0” by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. Will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure normal process shift setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step A 315) in the above-mentioned special view ordinary process and the special view routine process shift setting process 1 (step A 741) in the special figure display process described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1, first, "0" related to the special figure ordinary process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A322), the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A323). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) in the special view normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 23, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331) A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 333) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A 336) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect in the first special view fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting processing for setting information of fluctuation start of the first special drawing fluctuation display game (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) in the above special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

  As shown in FIG. 24, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
In FIG. 25, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process was shown. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A 351), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A353), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 To do (step A354). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A355) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area in which the outlier information is saved in step A352 (step A357 ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not Small hit determination processing (step A 358) for determining

  Then, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 358) is a small hit (step A 359; Y), the small hit information is saved by overwriting the small hit information in the small hit flag area saved with the out information in step A 351 (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 358) is not the small hit (step A 359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special view variation display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deterioration”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
In FIG. 26, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process was shown. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the out information was saved at step A 371 ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 27 shows the big hit determination process (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a drop, "other than a big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A 382; Y) Therefore, "other than big hit (out)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383).

  Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386) .

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 357), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), Since it is a hit or a drop, "other than big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), it is an off As the determination result, "other than big hit (out)" is set (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 28 shows small hit determination processing (steps A159 and A358) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391). In addition, small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a hit is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a disconnection, a gap is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 29, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 change start process was shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51a) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A 407), the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the rendering mode shifts in response to a hit, and the transition destination of the rendering mode, which shifts after an end, changes in accordance with the type of the hit symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, if it becomes a specific big hit symbol (for example, 2R positive variation symbol or 16R positive variation A2b symbol) among the big hits in the special figure 1, depending on whether or not the gaming state is in change, the transition destination's effect mode It is determined whether to shift to a rendering mode in which it becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is a dedicated rendering mode in which the probability variation is fixed or whether it is a probability variation. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). If it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), the off stop symbol pattern is in the stop symbol pattern area Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 30 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A 431), and if it is a big hit (step A 431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 51b) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A 437), and the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, it becomes a dedicated effect mode in which the effect mode of the transfer destination becomes a definite variation determination regardless of which big hit symbol. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 441). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443), and a rendering command setting process (step A444) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening (starting entry 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variation winning) The variable display game execution means is configured to execute the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the gaming ball in the device 37). In addition, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special view information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. In the case of this embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, presence / absence of time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the change, and the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of the change. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the special view information setting process, first, the former half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the former half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Then, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the former half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Then, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Then, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Then, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is ended. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reserve information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start pattern change process (steps A167, A336, A346) will be described. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472) Load and prepare the variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) (step A 473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure between a hit and a break. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is judged whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval (step A 474), and if it is disapproval (step A 474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step A 475) is performed and the process of step A 477 is performed. Transfer to processing. If not (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A 477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1), Prepare (step A 478). Then, distribution processing (step A 479) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step A 480). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A 481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A 482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). To do (step A 484). Thereafter, distribution processing (step A485) is performed, the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (step A486), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-mentioned special drawing 1 fluctuation start process and special drawing 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 497). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A 498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A 499), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step A 500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the free space after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1)]
FIG. 34 shows the processing for setting transition to a process during special figure fluctuation in the special figure normal process (special figure 1) (step A310). In the special figure variation process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). After that, save the in-fluctuation flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51a blink cycle timer) in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step A515). Here, 52 ms) is set (step A 516), and the special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 1) is ended.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2)]
FIG. 35 shows the processing for setting transition to a process during special figure fluctuation in the special figure normal process (special figure 2) (step A305). In the special figure variation process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A521), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A522).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and set the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 51 b blink cycle timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step A525) Here, 104 ms) is set (step A 526), and the special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 2) is ended.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). ). In the case of this embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Next, the special-image display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special-image display process is ended. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process transition setting process during special map display]
FIG. 37 shows the processing for setting the processing shift during processing of the special view during the processing for the special view fluctuation described above (step A603). In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A613), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example 2) Save the fluctuation signal in the test signal output data area (Step A614), and start the control timer in the control signal area for the number of times the symbol is determined according to the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51a, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51a is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A616) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 51b as the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 51b (step A617), Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701). The small hit flag area is cleared (step A702).
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) A process (Step A704) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 705) and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal for the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the commodity continuous operation device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A 708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706) and a big hit (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit value ("16" or "2" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is acquired. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit value area of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the round number upper limit value is prepared (step A716), and effect command setting processing (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A 718, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON if the big hit with popped out (big prize opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opened information 1), the big hit without popping out (so-called, 確 certain big hit etc. Large winning opening open If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, it will be OFF otherwise. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.

  After that, the big hit opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game The setting is made (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step A722) The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 725; Y), the high probability change number updating process (step A 726), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step A 727) ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special drawing high probability is not found (step A728; N), the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability of the special view is being reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played In order not to make the person conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), the high probability change number updating process (step A 735), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step A 736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation number corresponding to the rendering mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the rendering remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
When it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A 738; N), special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 (step A 741) is performed, and special drawing display Finish the middle process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A 739). After the processing (step A740) is performed, special processing shift processing setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing of displaying the special drawing is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation number updating process (steps A 726 and A 735) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the high probability change number of times update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability (during high probability state) is in progress (step A751). If it is not in the special figure height probability (step A 751: N), the high probability change number of times update process is ended. If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A 751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number is updated by −1 (step A 752), and it is determined whether the high probability fluctuation number becomes “0” (step A 753) ).

If the high probability fluctuation number is not "0" (step A753; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. Also, when the high probability fluctuation number becomes "0" (step A753; Y), the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal related to the high probability end (for example, 2 signals for the big hit is turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area.
Then, signals regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation The time saving state signal is OFF, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. In addition, since there is a state of "high probability & time reduction" and a state of "high probability & time reduction none", even the special drawing high probability, only the probability state changes, so the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and The ordinary electric role 1 open extension state signal is always off.

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A757), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A758), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. The low probability & time saving none flag is saved (step A759).
Next, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A760), and display the LED during right hitting (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57). In order to extinguish the game, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 761), and the high probability change number of times update process is ended.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A 727 and A 736) in the above-described special view display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode shift information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode shift information is the no update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed, and for example, the effect mode which continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no update code (step A 771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special view variation display game up to the change of the effect mode, is updated by −1 (step A 772) Then, it is determined whether the effect remaining number of revolutions has become "0" (step A773). If the effect remaining number of revolutions is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the effect remaining rotation speed becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special image variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774) The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), and the effect rotation number in the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RWM It saves in the area (step A677), acquires the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the state of the probability has not changed, the rendering mode information check process is ended.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782), An effect command setting process (step A 782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed.
Next, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A 785), and effect command setting processing (step A 786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A 787), and if it is not a mode to hit the left (step A 787; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the mode is left-handed (step A 787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A 788), rendering command setting processing (step A 789) is performed, and rendering mode information check processing is ended. Do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) in the above-described process of displaying the special view will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A 791), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A 792).

  Next, save the signal about the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal ON (big hit + small hit output), big hit 4 signal ON (big hit output)) in the external information output data area (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 794). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the ordinary drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and a number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A796). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A 797).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and a high probability notification flag for turning off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) 58 provided on the gaming board 30 related to the display of the high probability state The area is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801). The high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of display games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the effect mode 1 number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A 803), the effect remaining rotational speed area is cleared (step A 804), and the no update code is saved in the next mode shift information area (step A 805). . Then, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is ON) relating to a right-handling instruction in the test signal output data area (step A806), and display LED during right-handing (for example, first gaming state display unit 57). In order to light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the special figure display process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 43, in the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1, first, “7” for the small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is processed as a special drawing game process. Save to the number area (step A812).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 813), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for big hit is ON (big hit + small hit output) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A 814), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 815).

Next, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A 816), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 817).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed command (fire position designation signal 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A11) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902) And effect command setting processing (step A 903).

Thereafter, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A 904), the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is obtained (step A 905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the obtained release switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A 906; Y), save the special opening for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 907), A special winning opening open processing transition processing setting process (step A 909) is performed, and the fanfare / in-interval processing ends.
Also, if the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A 906; N), save the special opening game opening time for long opening (for example, 29 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 908) The special winning opening open processing transition processing setting process (step A 909) is performed, and the fanfare / in-interval processing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, (1) 2R, large winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening opening information 2 (all long opening), (3) as a big hit pattern 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R long opening, 5 to 16R short opening), (4) 16R, large winning opening opening information 4 (1 to 4R long opening, 5 to 16R short opening) , (5) 16R, big winning opening opening information 5 (all long opening), (6) 16R, large winning opening opening information 6 (1 to 8R long opening, 9 to 16R short opening), (7) 16R, Large winning opening opening information 7 (1 to 4 R is long opening, 5 to 16 R is short opening) is set.
Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0", the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16", the special winning opening The release information 3 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening release information 5 data and the opening switching determination value "16" The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, the open operation is performed such that the open operation is short open when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[A special winning opening open process processing transition setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the process setting setting processing during large winning opening opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing (step A909). In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process, first, set the processing number to "4" for the special winning opening opening processing (step A911), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A 912). After that, save a signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A 913) and store the number of winnings on the special winning opening. The information on the winning opening count number area is cleared (step A 914). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step A12) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state under execution and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, if it is not the final round (step A1001; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1002), acquire the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (step A1003), It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (eg, 1.4 seconds) for the short closing in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005), Prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011), and the special winning opening is open. End the process.

  Also, if the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A1004; N), save the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006), prepare an interval command (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011), and end the special winning opening open processing Do.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), save the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and end the special gaming state. The ending command concerning display control etc. of the ending display screen in the case is prepared (step A1009), rendering command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, The special winning opening open processing ends.

[Large winning hole remaining ball processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 47 shows the special winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing. In the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process, first, the processing number is set to "5" for the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, save the off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023) The sphere process transition setting process is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1102), and obtain the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information Then (step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105), and if the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Transfer to processing of If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening information is a rank down effect type value (step A1106).

  Here, the rank down effect is a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues, and an effect for notifying that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect corresponds. Specifically, as a big hit pattern, "16R, big winning opening open information 2 (all long open)" and "16R, big winning opening open information 3 (1 to 4 R long open, 5 to 16 R short open)" The display screen of the display device 41 from the big hit round 1R to 3R when any of “16R, big winning opening open information 4 (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open)” is selected. A predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the 4Rth, and a round continuation informing effect is executed. If the selected jackpot pattern is "16R, big winning opening open information 2 (all open long)", round continuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is long open also in the rounds after 5R If the big hit pattern opened and selected is "16R, big winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4 R is long opening, 5 to 16 R is short opening)", round non-continuation notification is notified in the round continuation notification effect, The big prize winning opening will be opened by short opening in the round after the 5th R eyes.

If the special winning opening information is not a rank down effect value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. When the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for rank down effect is set (step) A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. In addition, the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing Finish.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area storing the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and set the ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, the big hit end process shift setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 49 shows the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 2 (step A 1110) in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball process. In this fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1122).
Next, save a signal (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal is OFF) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The middle processing shift setting processing 2 ends.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 50 shows the big hit end process shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball process. In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal (for example, the special electric symbol 1 in operation is OFF) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A1134), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A1135) ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A1136). Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (step A1137), and of the special winning opening open information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the special winning opening The information is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end process shift setting process is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in this big hit end process, it is first determined whether the time reduction determination data is time saving operation data (step A1201).
When it is not time saving operation data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A 902), and when it is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), big hit ending setting processing 2 is performed (step A 903) . Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (Step A1206). Furthermore, the effect mode rotational speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the rendering mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1210), and rendering command setting processing (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands further including information of the rendering mode in any of “high probability, time reduction” and “high probability, no time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, when the big hit is over, it becomes a definite change state (so-called ST state). Therefore, as a probability information command, "high probability · time short · presentation mode A", "high probability · time short · presentation mode B" There are "High probability · Time reduction · Reproduction mode C" and "High probability · Time reduction none · Reproduction mode A", which are not used in this process, but others are "Low probability · Time reduction none · Reproduction mode A", " There are low probability, no time saving, rendering mode B, and "low probability, no time saving, rendering mode C".

Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation frequency command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), rendering command setting processing (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the time saving state occurs after the big hit end (step A1216) .
When the time saving state occurs after the big hit end (step A1216; Y), the special view ordinary process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.
In addition, when the time saving state does not occur after the big hit end (step A1216; N), prepare the left hitting indication notification command (step A1217), perform special command setting processing (step A1218), and shift to special processing routine processing The setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 52 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In this big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding no time saving state (for example, 2 big hit signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), a signal regarding the start of high probability state and no time saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1224), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving none flag are saved (step A1225). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A1226), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227), in order to turn off the right hitting display LED (the first gaming state display unit 57), save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting processing 1 Finish.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 53 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the short time state (for example, the big hit 2 signal is ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). A signal relating to the start of the short time state is saved from inside the big hit and is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Then, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation The time reduction state signal is ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, save the number with time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1233), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1234), and in the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving flag are saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A1256), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from the big hit, the setting regarding the right hitting is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms a specific gaming state generation means capable of generating a specific gaming state (time reduction state) over a predetermined period determined in advance after the end of the special gaming state. And in the specific gaming state, while controlling the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 so that the winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easier than when it is not the specific gaming state, than when not in the specific gaming state The first special view variation display game, the second special view variation display game, and the common view variation display game are configured to be reduced in variation time.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting process 2]
FIG. 54 shows the special view ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-described big hit end process. In the special view routine process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number relating to the special figure routine process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242) .

  After that, save the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, the big hit 3 signal OFF, the big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1243), the signal about the big hit end (eg The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information of the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information of the special view game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the flag during the injustice monitoring period in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and set special processing shift processing 2 Finish.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the small hit fanfare medium process, a small hit medium process transfer setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hitting Medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit middle processing shift setting process (step A1301) in the above-described small hit fanfare medium middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the small hitting medium process transition setting process, first, "8" for the small hit medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is processed as a special figure game process. The file is saved in the number area (step A1312).

Next, save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), a signal regarding the start of the small hitting operation (for example, special electric role 1 During operation, the signal is turned ON) and saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Subsequently, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A 1316), save the small hitting operation initial value (for example, "0") in the small hitting middle control pointer area (Step A1317), the small hitting middle process transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
Next, details of the small hit middle process (step A16) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the small hitting medium process, first, the value of the small hitting medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (for example, “6”) Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting middle control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. End processing during hit.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is in the special figure height probability. It is determined whether it is a flag related to (step A1406). Thereby, it is determined whether the small hit in the special figure height probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in progress.
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is ended. Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a small hit end screen command (step A1407), perform rendering command setting processing (step A1408), The small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting operation shift setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the small hitting operation shift setting process, the branching process (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (small hitting middle control pointer).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2” or “4” at step A1411, the wait time (eg, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412), The off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.
If the control pointer is "1", "3" or "5" at step A1411, the special winning opening open time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414) The on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 ms, the opening of 200 ms and the closing of 1500 ms are alternately performed, and the small hit middle control pointer is sequentially at the end of opening and at the end of closing. It will be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “0,” 1 At the end of the first 1500 ms closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500 ms closing to the second 200 ms opening), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “1”, and the second 200 ms opening is performed. The small hit middle control pointer is updated to "2" at the end, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, and the small hit middle control at the end of the third 200 ms open The pointer is updated to "4" and the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 ms opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the lapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the small hit ending time of 100 ms thereafter, the small hit The state ends. Therefore, since it is closed for 2000 ms after the fourth 200 ms opening, the visual ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting process, first, “9” for the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A 1421), and the processing number is set to the special drawing game processing number Save to the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit residual ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424), small The remaining ball processing shift setting process is ended.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 59A, in the small hit residual ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting end processing shift setting process (step A1501) in the above-mentioned small hit residual ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the small hitting end process transition setting process, first, "10" according to the small hitting end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is processed as a special drawing game process. The file is saved in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric character 1 operating signal is turned off) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, clear the information of the large winning opening count count area (step A1515), clear the information of the small hit middle control pointer area (for example, clear 0) (step A1516), and end the small hit end processing shift setting process .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, in the small hitting end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), the effect mode set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) The address of the table corresponding to the transition information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A 776), the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RAM The image data is saved in the area (step A1606), the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and the next mode shift information area in the RWM is saved (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A 1614), and effect command setting processing (step A 1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A1616), and if it is not a mode to hit the left (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after the rendering command setting process (step A1618) is performed, the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time-short (time-short state) (step A1620).
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to special drawing time reduction (step A1620; Y), special drawing transition processing setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing is ended.
Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special drawing time (N in step A 1620; N), save a signal relating to a left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A1621), in order to turn off the display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) in the right hitting, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state indication number 2 area (step A1622) Processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing is ended.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hitting end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special processing routine processing transition setting processing, first, "0" related to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is set as the special processing game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, save the signal related to the small hit end (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal related to the small hit end (eg special symbol 1 small hit signal OFF) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special view game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3 is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is ended.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 63 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the special view game process described above, and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the common drawing game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2101) . In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

If the fluctuation flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  Also, when the blinking control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the changing flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A2106 is a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure variation display game) A value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of), and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (generally drawn fluctuation display game) It is done. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A2108 and A2111, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

  Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variation display of the first special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting pattern of eight times. In addition, 2 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (the second special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol numbers can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variable indication of the second special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting patterns of two times. Further, 4 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-3. Therefore, the common drawing in-progress display, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the common drawing change display game, makes one round of four lighting pattern updates.

  By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 64 shows the distribution process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the second half variation selection table is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. In the process for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number) or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. is there.

  In this distribution process, first, the head data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483) Is checked if it is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2201). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not require distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

Then, if the head data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distributed result The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is ended.
On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table) And one distribution value defined first in the latter half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table) (step A2203).

  Subsequently, the distributed value acquired in step A2203 is subtracted from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in step A473, A478 or A484, and a new random number value is calculated. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then it is determined in the previous step A2205 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).
The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). Thereby, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table or first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).
Then, if it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 65 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step A475) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the top data in the selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in step A 472) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2301). Here, although the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half specifies only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table (for example, a part of fluctuation group table when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head .

Then, if the first data in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A2307). End the distribution process.
On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A473 (step A2304), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is newly subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table).
When it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 64 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 65 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes? Because they differ in that, the program instructions to calculate are different.

[Demonstration point control & definite change / non-deterministic change symbol switching control]
Next, the “effect point control” and the “probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control” that are characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

The effect control device 300 causes the display device 41 to display the decorative feature variation display game (variation display effect). In the decoration special figure variation display game in this embodiment, the identification symbol (an ornament special symbol) composed of numbers is variably displayed in each of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area, and is varied after a predetermined time It is carried out by displaying the result of the special figure fluctuation display game by stopping the identification symbol doing and displaying the result of the special view fluctuation display game according to the result mode constituted by the three identification symbols stopped and displayed. For example, when the result of the special view variation display game is a special result (for example, a big hit), it is displayed on the display device 41 as a result mode with a probability change symbol (that is, a probability change display mode (red in this embodiment)). A result mode in which the identification symbols being displayed are aligned or a non-probable variation symbol (that is, a identification pattern displayed in the non-probability display mode (in the case of the present embodiment, blue) is aligned) is derived. Then, when the result mode in which the probability variation symbols are aligned is derived, the high probability state (probability state) occurs after the end of the special game state.
In the drawings, for the sake of convenience, red is shown in black (filled) and blue is shown in white (white). Of course, the definite variation display mode is not limited to red and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the non-probability display mode is not limited to blue, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the initial setting, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the odd symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) of the identification symbols are definite symbols, and the identification symbols are Of the even symbols ("0", "2", "4", "6") are non-probable variation symbols. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the even symbol is configured to be switched from the non-probable variation symbol to the probability variation symbol by changing the display mode of the even symbol from the non-probability variation display mode to the probability variation display mode.

Further, the effect control device 300 is configured to add points when the point addition condition is satisfied between the first time point and the second time point.
In this embodiment, a point in time when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the variation stop of the decorative feature variation display game is taken as the second point in time, and the player's game start point (specifically, after reaching the second point) , The fluctuation start time of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game which is executed first is designated as the 1st time.
In addition, when the variation start of the decoration special figure variation display game, when the pre-reading effect execution of the point addition object is executed, when the change effect execution of the point addition object is executed, the button operation continuation object of the point addition object is continued When the target value is reached, it is determined that the point addition condition (point provision condition) is satisfied, and a predetermined point is added to the number of points.
The point addition conditions (point provision conditions) are not limited to these. For example, when a game is performed continuously for a predetermined time, or when a specific symbol stop mode (point addition symbol stop mode) such as "241" is stopped and displayed, a dedicated symbol (special purpose symbol indicating point addition) It is determined that the point addition condition (point giving condition) is satisfied, etc., when the point addition symbol of, or the symbol to be normally stopped is displayed with a symbol such as "+ 10P" added to it. A predetermined point may be added to the number of points.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), when performing pre-reading effect execution for point addition target
(1) When the result mode indicating transition to the pre-reading zone is stopped and displayed (for example, when 3 dedicated symbols are stopped and displayed, or 1 dedicated symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area) ,
(2) When the result mode indicating the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is stopped and displayed (for example, the predetermined non-probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined variable display area (may be any variable display area)) When, or when a predetermined probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined variation display region (may be any variation display region), or “7” of the probability variation symbols is of three variation display regions When one or two of them are stopped),
(3) It is when a probability change big hit retention (ie, a special feature start memory in which the result becomes a "probability change hit") occurs.

In addition, the time of the variation effect (effect relating to the special figure variation display game under execution) execution of the point addition target is, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c),
(1) When a predetermined reach (for example, SP0 reach, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, SP3 reach) presentation is over and the next presentation is started,
(2) When the specific reach effect generated during the pre-reading zone is finished and the next effect is started,
(3) It is when a predetermined character (for example, characters SU1, SU2, SU3) appears.

In addition, the button operation continuation target for point addition is, for example, as shown in FIG. 66C, when the touch operation on the rendering operation unit 550 continues for a predetermined condition satisfaction time (for example, 4 seconds). When the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 continues the predetermined condition satisfaction time, it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and thereafter, in the state where the touch operation continues, the predetermined point provision time (for example, 0.2 seconds) One point is awarded each time it passes.
Also, when the number of points earned reaches the bonus target value, for example, as shown in FIG. 66D, it is when the number of points earned is Zorome.

The effect control device 300 changes the display mode of the even symbol from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode when the number of acquired points reaches the specified number. After that, when the second time point is reached, the display mode of the even symbol switched to the odd variation symbol is returned from the positive variation display mode to the non-positive variation display mode (that is, in the state of initial setting (see FIG. 66A)). It is configured to clear the number of points earned.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the number of acquired points reaches “100”, the display mode of the identification symbol “0” is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode and acquired When the number of points reaches "300", the display mode of the identification symbol "6" is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode, and when the number of acquired points reaches "1000", the identification pattern "2" The display mode is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode. That is, as the number of points earned increases, the number (total number) of oddly variable symbols increases and the number (total number) of non-probable variation symbols decreases.

Further, the effect control device 300 is configured to change the display mode of the even symbols from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode even when the probability variation big hit is generated.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the probability change big hit is generated and the result of the pre-reading of the hold is notified from the game control apparatus 100, the display mode of the identification symbol "4" is not It changes from a definite change display mode to a positive change display mode.

  The display on the display device 41 at the time of executing the "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control" will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 73 and 75. As shown in the figures, an undigested start storage display area R1 for displaying the current number of special view start memories is provided at, for example, the lower center of the display area of the display device 41. For example, on the lower left side of the lower part, a decorative special drawing corresponding to the acquired point number display area R2 for displaying the current number of acquired points, and the starting memory that triggered the execution of the fluctuation The variable start storage display area (digestive start storage display area) R3 for displaying the start storage display is provided.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of display when changing the display mode of even symbols from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode based on the number of acquired points reaching the specified number.
As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), one point is added at the start of the fluctuation. Note that the changing identification symbol (decorative special symbol) may be displayed in a display mode in which it is possible to determine whether it is a probability variation symbol pattern or a non-probability variation symbol symbol, or in a non-determinable display manner. It is good.
Next, when the result of the fluctuation (special figure fluctuation display game being executed) is “off”, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the result mode of the detachment is derived. Here, since the special view start memory number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, it is possible to randomly set an identification symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points.
Then, if the result of the change is “off”, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), the result mode of the off is derived. Here, although the number of special figure starting memory numbers is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, the number of points earned is “99”, and the number of points earned is specified as the specified number at the start of variation of the next special figure variation display game As it reaches, the stop display of the non-probable symbol is forced. In this embodiment, when the number of acquired points reaches the specified number, one of the non-probable variation symbols (the variation target symbol) is based on the symbol variation condition and the variation symbol of FIG. 66 (b). The display mode is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode. Then, in order to cause the player to recognize that the non-probable variation symbol has been switched to the probable variation symbol, the change target symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in any of the left variation display region, the middle variation display region, and the right variation display region.

In the case of this embodiment, since the change target symbol corresponding to the acquired point number “100” is “0” (see FIG. 66 (b)), the acquired point number is defined at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game fluctuation When reaching "100" of the numbers, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), it may be a middle fluctuation display area (or a left fluctuation display area or a right fluctuation display area. , And any one of the three variable display areas may be displayed.)) The identification symbol "0" is forcibly stopped and displayed.
In addition, since the change target symbol corresponding to the acquired point number “300” is “6” (see FIG. 66 (b)), the acquired point number is at the start of the fluctuation of the next special figure fluctuation display game In the case of reaching "300", the identification symbol "6" is forcibly stopped and displayed.
In addition, since the change target symbol corresponding to the acquired point number “1000” is “2” (see FIG. 66 (b)), the number of acquired points is at the start of the fluctuation of the next special figure fluctuation display game When "1000" is reached, the identification symbol "2" is forcibly stopped and displayed.
As a result, it is possible to notify (recognize) the player of the change in the display mode of the identification symbol (even symbol).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game starts, points are added to the number of points. Since the number of points acquired reaches the specified number by this addition and symbol change conditions are satisfied, as shown in FIGS. 67 (e) and (f), the display mode of the change target symbol is from the non-probability change display manner to the probability change display It changes to an aspect. At that time, as shown in FIGS. 67 (e) and 67 (f), after highlighting the change target symbol or changing the display mode of the change target symbol, the change display symbol is displayed in the change display area stopped. In addition, it is possible to more clearly notify (recognize) the player of the change in the display mode by starting the variable display of the symbol or by performing white fade or the like while the display mode of the change target symbol changes. It becomes possible.

68 and 69 are diagrams showing an example of display when returning the display mode of the even symbol switched to the odd change symbol from the positive change display mode to the non-positive change display mode.
As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points.
Then, if the result of the change is "off", as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the result mode of the off is derived. Here, since the special view start memory number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, it is possible to randomly set an identification symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points.
Then, if the result of the change is "off", as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the result mode of the off is derived. Here, since the special view start memory number is “1 (other than“ 0 ”)”, it is possible to randomly set an identification symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game starts, points are added to the number of points.
Then, if the result of the change is “off”, as shown in FIG. 68 (f), the result mode of the off is derived. Here, since the special figure start memory number is “0” and the special figure start memory for generating the next special figure variable display game is not stored, the variable stop is performed. In the present embodiment, when the second time point (when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the change stop) is reached, the display mode of the even symbols switched to the positive change symbol is changed from the positive change display Back to. Therefore, the player recognizes that the display mode has changed to the non-probability change display mode, that is, the probability change pattern has been switched to the non-probability change pattern (returned) unless the even symbol switched to the probability change symbol is stopped and displayed I can not do it. Therefore, the left variation display area with the even symbol having the highest probability of changing the display mode from the non-probability display mode to the probability variation display mode, that is, the even pattern whose display mode initially changes to the probability display mode is the change target pattern. The display is forcibly stopped in any of the middle variation display area and the right variation display area.

In the case of this embodiment, since the even symbol whose display mode first changes to the probability variation display mode is "0" (see FIG. 66 (b)), as shown in FIG. 68 (f), the middle variation display area (or The left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, or any two of the three fluctuation display areas may be used. Stop display. Thereby, it is possible to inform (recognize) the player of the change in the display mode of the identification symbol.
In addition, when the number of special figure starting memory numbers is "0" (that is, when it becomes a change stop), the display mode changes to the probability variation display mode first regardless of the presence or absence of the even symbol switching to the definite variation symbol. The processing load can be reduced by forcibly stopping and displaying the even symbols to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), when the variation display of the decorative feature variation display game is stopped, the countdown display H1 for notifying the remaining time up to the second time point appears, and FIG. 69 (b) As shown, as the remaining time until the second time point decreases, the acquired point number display area R2 gradually disappears.
Then, when the next special figure fluctuation display game is not started until the remaining time until the second time point becomes “0” (that is, until the second time point is reached), as shown in FIG. 69 (c). As shown in FIGS. 69 (d) and 69 (e), the acquired point number display area R2 disappears altogether, and the display mode of the change target symbol returns from the probability display mode to the non-probability display mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in f), it will be in a state of waiting for setting of customer waiting demo. At that time, as shown in FIGS. 69 (d) and 69 (e), the change display pattern is highlighted by highlighting the change target pattern, or by performing white fade or the like while the display pattern of the change target symbol returns. It is possible to notify (recognize) the player more clearly.
On the display, although the display mode of a part of the even symbols switched to the odd variation symbol is returned from the positive variation indication mode to the non-probability variation display mode, internally, all the even symbols switched to the odd variation design The display mode returns from the probability display mode to the non-probability display mode. That is, the state returns to the state of the initial setting (see FIG. 66 (a)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when changing the display mode of the even symbol from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode, the change target symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, or the number of special view start memories is "0". At the time, although it was configured to forcibly stop and display even symbols whose display mode changes to a definite change display mode at first, it is not limited to this. For example, when changing the display mode of the even symbol from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode, or when the number of special view start memories is “0”, the identification symbol to be stopped may be set randomly.
Further, even if the even symbol which has been changed to the probability display mode is returned to the non-probability display mode due to the occurrence of the big hit, the number of acquired points may be cleared. Furthermore, when the pre-reading effect is performed during a big hit (during a predetermined round, at the time of ending, etc.), the number of even symbols to be returned to the non-probability display mode is changed from the probability display mode to the preread result You may make it alert | report. For example, if there is no probability change big hit in the start memory stored at the end of the big hit, the even symbol changed to the positive change display mode is returned to the non-probable change display mode, and the start memory stored at the big hit end When there is a probability change big hit retention in, the even symbols that have changed to the probability change display mode may not be returned to the non-probability change display mode. In addition, when there is a definite variation big hit in the start memory stored at the end of the big hit, and the number of even symbols changing to the definite variation display mode is less than a predetermined number, as an effect during the big hit Even symbols may be changed to the probability variation display mode.

FIGS. 70-72 change the display mode of the even symbol from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode based on the occurrence of the probability variation big hit retention (ie, the special figure start memory in which the result is the "probability variation big hit"). It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of making it.
In this embodiment, the display mode of the identification symbol "4" is configured to be changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode when the probability variation big hit is generated (see FIG. 66 (b)).

FIG. 70 shows a pattern in which the display mode of even symbols is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode at the start of the special view change display game based on the probability variation big hit suspension.
As shown in FIG. 70 (a), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points. In addition, when a strange variation big hit occurs and the prefetching result of the suspension is notified from the game control apparatus 100, the prefetching special drawing start memory display H2 corresponding to the suspension (probable variation big hit suspension) is undigested start storage display area Displayed on R1. In the present embodiment, this pre-reading decoration special figure starting memory indication H2 is configured to be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the other decoration special figure starting storing display (for example, different color, presence or absence of rocking display) It is done.

Then, if the result of the change is “off”, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the result mode of the off is derived. Here, since the special view start memory number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, it is possible to randomly set an identification symbol to be stopped and displayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points. It should be noted that the pre-reading effect may be stepped up each time the special-figure start memory is digested (that is, whenever the display position of the pre-reading decoration special figure start-memory display H2 shifts).

Then, if the result of the change is “off”, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the result mode of the off is derived. Here, although the special figure starting memory number is “1 (other than“ 0 ”)”, since the next special figure fluctuation display game is a game based on the probability change big hit hold, the non-probable change symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed .
In this pattern, the display mode of the identification symbol "4" changes from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode at the start of the special-figure variation display game based on the probability variation big hit suspension. In addition, at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the probability variation big hit retention, a predetermined point is added (see FIG. 66 (c)), and the number of earned points reaches "1000", so other than the identification symbol "4" The display mode of the non-probable variation symbol (that is, the symbol which is not switched to the probability variation symbol among the identification symbols “0”, “6” and “2”) changes from the non-probability variation display mode to the probability variation display mode. Therefore, it is possible to notify (recognize) a change in the display mode of the identification symbol by forcibly stopping and displaying the non-probable variation symbol as the change target symbol.

In the case where there are four change target symbols (i.e., there is no even symbol switched to the odd symbol), it is possible to randomly set an identification symbol to be displayed to be stopped among the four change target symbols.
Further, in the case where there are three change target symbols, for example, different change target symbols are forcibly stopped and displayed in each of the three variable display areas.
Further, in the case where there are two change target symbols, for example, one of the change target symbols is forcibly stopped and displayed in any two of the three change display areas, and the other change target is displayed in the remaining change display areas. The symbol is forced to stop display.
Also, if there is one change target symbol, that is, if the non-probability symbol is only "4", for example, the identification symbol "4" is forcibly stopped in one or two of the three variable display areas Display the stationary variable symbols (ie, identification symbols other than "4") in the remaining variable display area.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 70 (e) and 70 (f), the number of acquired points reaches "1000", and the display mode of the change target symbol changes from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode. At that time, as shown in FIGS. 70 (e) and 70 (f), after highlighting the change target symbol or changing the display mode of the change target symbol, the change display symbol is displayed in the change display area stopped. In addition, it is possible to more clearly notify (recognize) the player of the change in the display mode by starting the variable display of, or performing white fade etc. while the display mode of the change target symbol changes. It becomes possible.

In addition, point addition may be performed after the change of a display mode, and the number of acquisition points may reach "1000".
In addition, when the number of acquired points reaches "1000", the display mode of the number of acquired points in the acquired point number display area R2 may be changed to a specific display mode.
In addition, at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the definite variation big hit reserve, 1000 points etc. are added and the number of acquisition points is made to reach "1000" so that all identification symbols become definite variation symbols, but it is limited to this It is not necessary to cause the number of points acquired to reach “1000” at the start of the special-pattern variation display game based on the probability variation big hit hold, instead of the above. In this case, at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the probability variation big hit reserve, even if there is a non-probable variation pattern among the identification symbols "0", "6" and "2", only the display pattern of the identification symbol "4" Is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode.
Also, as shown in the patterns in FIG. 71 and FIG. 72 described later, point addition is performed stepwise so that the number of acquired points reaches “1000”, and the number (total number) of probability variations is gradually increased. Also good.

In FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, the display mode of the even symbols is sequentially changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode from the occurrence of the probability variation big hit retention to the start of the special view variation display game based on the probability variation big hit retention. Indicates a pattern.
As shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points. In addition, when a strange variation big hit occurs and the prefetching result of the suspension is notified from the game control apparatus 100, the prefetching special drawing start memory display H2 corresponding to the suspension (probable variation big hit suspension) is undigested start storage display area Displayed on R1.

Then, if the result of the change is “off”, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the result mode of the off is derived. Here, although the special figure starting memory number is “3 (other than“ 0 ”)”, since the probability variation big hit is generated, the non-probability variation symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. Since the number of points currently acquired is "72" and there is no even symbol switched to the odd variation symbol, the even symbol whose display mode changes to the probable variation display mode is forcedly stopped and displayed as a change target symbol.
Then, even if the number of acquired points reaches “100”, the display mode changes from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode when the number of acquired points reaches “100” (“0” which is an even symbol whose display mode initially changes to the probability variation display mode In order to make the number of acquired points reach "100", a point addition display effect is performed in FIG. 66 (b)). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 71 (c), as the point addition display effect, a display effect is performed such that the pre-reading decoration special drawing start storage display H2 affects the point addition.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), when the variation display of the decoration special view variation display game is started, the points are added and the number of points acquired reaches “100”, and the display mode of the change target symbol “0” Changes from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (e), the variable display is also started in the variable display area (in the case of this example, the middle fluctuation display area) in which the change target symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, if the result of the change is “off”, as shown in FIG. 71 (f), the result mode of the off is derived. Here, although the special drawing start memory number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, since the probability variation big hit is generated, the non-probability variation symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. Since the number of points currently acquired is "100" and the even symbol switched to the odd symbol is only "0", change "6" which is the even symbol whose display mode changes to the definite display mode second The stop display is forcibly displayed as the target symbol.
Next, “6”, which is an even symbol whose display mode changes to the second display mode, changes to the second display mode from the non-probability display mode to the second display mode when the number of acquired points reaches “300”. As shown in FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 72 (a), a point addition display effect is performed in order to reach the number of acquired points of "300".
Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the variation display of the decoration special view variation display game is started, the points are added and the number of points obtained reaches "300", and the display mode of the change target symbol "6" Changes from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the variable display is also started in the variable display area (in the case of this example, the middle fluctuation display area) in which the change target symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, if the result of the change is “off”, as shown in FIG. Here, although the special figure starting memory number is “1 (other than“ 0 ”)”, since the next special figure fluctuation display game is a game based on probability variation big hit suspension, all of even symbols which are not switched to probability variation symbols Is forcibly displayed as a change target symbol.
Then, the display mode changes from a non-probability display mode to a probability display mode when the number of acquired points reaches "1000", which is the even symbol "3", which changes the display mode to a probability display mode. As shown in FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 72 (e), a point addition display effect is performed in order to cause the number of points acquired to reach “1000”.
Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (f), when the variation display of the decoration special view variation display game is started, points are added and the number of points acquired reaches “1000”, and the display mode of the change target symbol is not It changes from the probability variation display mode to the probability variation display mode. After that, the big hit fluctuation is started.

In the case of the patterns shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the start timing of the display mode change effect may be set according to the number of non-probable variation symbols. Specifically, for example, in the case where the third special drawing reserve is a probability variation big hit reserve and the number of points earned is "300" or more (that is, the identification symbols "0" and "6" are display modes. Is changed to the definite variation display mode, while the identification symbols "2" and "4" have two special patterns reserved in the case where the display mode has not changed to the definite variation display mode) When the big hit hold becomes the first special view hold, start the display mode change production, and at the start of the fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game based on the hold of the previous positive change big hit hold of the identification symbol "2" The display mode is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode, and the display mode of the identification symbol "4" at the start of the next special figure variation display game (ie, the special figure variation display game based on the probability variation big hit hold). Change from non-probability display mode to It may be allowed to.
Further, whether to display in the pattern shown in FIG. 70 or in the pattern shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 may be selected randomly or may be selected based on a predetermined rule.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of display when points are added based on a touch operation on the effect operation unit 550.
FIG. 74 is a timing chart for explaining an example of point addition based on a touch operation on the effect operation unit 550.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), when the variation display of the decoration special view variation display game is started, the points are added to the number of points, and the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 becomes effective. Here, in the present embodiment, a period from the start to the end of the variable display is taken as a touch operation effective period. Further, when the effect of the point addition target is started before the end of the variable display, a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the effect of the point addition target is set as a touch operation effective period.
Then, if the result of the change is “off”, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the result mode of the off is derived. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), while the result mode is derived (that is, the symbol stop period), the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 is invalidated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (b) and FIG. 74 (a), when the variation display of the decorative feature variation display game is started, the points are added to the number of points, and the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 becomes effective. . In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), since the reach effect of the change effects of the point addition target is generated before the end of the change display of the decorative special view change display game, the touch operation is performed until the reach effect starts. Is activated.
When the touch operation on the rendering operation unit 550 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) during the touch operation valid period, it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and then the touch operation continues. One point is awarded each time the point grant time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (d) and FIG. 74 (a), when the reach effect is started, the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 becomes invalid, and the total of the points given during the touch operation effective period is the point It is added to the number. Therefore, even if the touch operation continues even after the start of the reach effect, only the sum of the points awarded until the start of the reach effect is added.
Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), when the reach effect ends, points corresponding to the type of the reach effect are added to the number of points. In the example shown in FIG. 73 (a), since the SP2 reach effect is finished, 10 points (see FIG. 66 (c)) are added as points corresponding to the SP2 reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), even if a touch operation is performed on the effect operation unit 550 during the touch operation effective period, the duration time of the touch operation reaches a predetermined condition satisfaction time (for example, 4 seconds) When the touch operation effective period ends before the decision, it is determined that the point addition condition is not satisfied, and the point addition based on the touch operation is not performed.
Although the rendering operation unit 550 is capable of both a touch operation (touch operation) and a pressing operation (push operation), the push operation of the rendering operation unit 550 is effective even during the touch operation effective period. It is configured to be able to

FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (c) are diagrams showing an example of display when point addition is performed based on the fact that the number of acquired points has reached Zoro.
In this example, the number of acquired points becomes “111” which is the Zoro eye as the variable display starts and one point is added, so 10 points as a point corresponding to “111” (FIG. 66 (c) ) Is added to the number of points.

It is also possible for the effect control device 300 to control the content of the effect in order to focus on the number of points acquired.
Specifically, for example, when the special figure variation display game is started and the number of acquired points becomes “Zoro-1” by point addition based on the variation start, the game control device related to the special figure variation display game Even if the command from 100 is reach occurrence, based on the start of fluctuation in the next special figure fluctuation display game without performing addition by reach effect by replacing it with the normal fluctuation effect pattern (render pattern without reach). The number of points acquired may be increased by adding points.
Also, conversely, for example, when the number of acquired points becomes Zoro by point addition based on the pre-read effect or point addition based on the change effect, the corresponding effect is executed regardless of the command from the game control device 100 The number of points acquired may be reduced by adding points based on the effect.

FIGS. 75 (d) to 75 (f) are diagrams showing an example of display when points are added based on the appearance of a predetermined character.
In this example, after the variable display starts and one point is added, a step-up notice effect (that is, an effect of sequentially executing notice effects set in a plurality of steps from a lower level to a predetermined level) occurs. The character SU1 of the characters appearing at the time of the step-up notice effect appears at each stage. Therefore, at each stage, 5 points (see FIG. 66C) are added to the number of points as points corresponding to the character SU1.

  In addition, when it becomes "the number of acquisition points> the number of acquisition points" from "the number of acquisition points <prescribed number" because the plural points (more than 2 points) are added, specifically, the number of acquired points is "97", for example. If point addition (10 points addition) based on SP2 reach is performed and the number of points acquired is “107” in the state, the number of acquisition points has reached the specified number after the addition with a character etc. You may make it change a display mode into a definite change display mode by the special figure fluctuation display game after the next, alerting | reporting.

  In addition, the number of points earned may be stored as the gaming history of the player by the interlocking service with the mobile phone, and the game may be started from the stored number of points at the next game. In this case, when the number of earned points stored is "100" or more, the next game can be started from a state in which the ratio of probability variation symbols is high.

In addition, when the display mode switching password is disclosed on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer and the password is input to the gaming machine 10, the mode set as the default as the probability display mode or the non-probability display mode is Different modes may be set.
In this case, the player can be continued by changing the usable password for each predetermined period and changing the display mode according to each period (for example, a snow pattern in winter, a cherry pattern in spring). It becomes possible to play a game.
Further, in this case, when the gaming machine is configured such that the usable password is made different for each gaming arcade and changed to a display mode unique to each gaming arcade, it becomes possible to perform an appeal unique to each gaming arcade.

According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the "effect point control" and the "probability / non-probability symbol switching control" described above, the game value is given to the player when the result of the game is a predetermined special result. In a possible gaming machine, a point giving means capable of giving points to a player based on the establishment of presentation control means (the presentation control device 300) for controlling an effect and establishment of predetermined point giving conditions (point addition conditions) in the game The presentation control device 300), and the presentation control means can change the presentation mode of the presentation based on the points given by the point giving means reaching the specified number.
Therefore, since the effect mode is changed by storing points, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the variable display effect (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 is changed based on the points reaching the specified number (specifically, the display of the even symbol) Although the mode is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the character displayed on the display device 41 is based on the points reaching the specified number. The frame (the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15) or the effect mode (the light emission mode) of the lamp (the light emitting means) disposed on the game board 30 may be changed. It is also possible to change the presentation aspect of display effects other than the variable display presentation, such as changing the sound output aspect from the speakers (speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) disposed in. Moreover, it is also possible to change the presentation aspect of the presentation in the presentation devices (including the decoration device) other than the display device 41.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the "effect point control" and the "probability / non-probability symbol switching control" described above, the special results include the probability result and the non-probability result. If there is a probability change state generation means (game control device 100) that generates a probability change state in which the probability that the result of the game is a special result is higher than the normal probability state when the result is a definite change result, The control device 300) can display on the display device 41 a variation display effect (decorative special view variation display game) in which a plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed corresponding to the game, and the result of the game becomes a definite variation result Of the identification symbols, if it is possible to stop and display on the display device 41 a result aspect consisting of symbols (probable variation symbols) of the identification symbols of the probability variation display aspect, and the result of the game is a non-determination result Non-probability display mode Results can be displayed on the display device 41 as a result mode configured with the symbol (non-probable variation symbol), and based on the points given by the point giving means (effect control device 300) reaching the specified number, the probability variation It is also possible to configure so as to change the ratio between the total number of symbols (probable variation symbols) of the display mode and the total number of symbols (non-probable variation symbols) of the non-probability variation display mode.

By configuring in this manner, the ratio between the total number of probability variation symbols and the total number of non probability variation symbols changes by storing points, so that it is possible to give the player the impression that the degree of expectation is changing, and the game Can enhance the interest of
In the present embodiment, while the total number of probability variation symbols is increased and the total number of non probability variation symbols is decreased each time a point reaches a prescribed number, the present invention is not limited thereto. Each time the number reaches a specified number, the total number of odd variation symbols may be reduced and the total number of non-probable variation symbols may be increased.
Further, in the present embodiment, although the prescribed number is a positive value, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prescribed number may be a negative value. In this case, every time the point reaches the specified number of positive values, the total number of probability variation symbols is increased and the total number of non-probable variation symbols is decreased, and whenever point reaches the specified number of negative values, probability variation While reducing the total number of symbols, it is also possible to constitute so that the total number of non-probable variation symbols may be increased. As a condition to subtract points, the firing operation is stopped during a specific reach when no button operation (touch operation to the effect operation unit 550, etc.) is performed at the time of occurrence of button effect (effect of causing the player to perform button operation). For example, there may be a case where the player does not actively participate in the game, such as performing a so-called stop.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the "effect point control" and the "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control" described above, the effect control means (production control device 300) is a symbol (non-probability change display mode To change the ratio of the total number of symbols (probable symbols) to the total number of non-probable symbols (non-probable symbols) by changing the display mode of the probability variation symbol to a probability display mode It is also possible to configure.
By configuring in this manner, the ratio of the probability change symbols increases by storing points, so that the player can be given an impression that the expectation is improved, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the player continues to play the game in an attempt to accumulate points, the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved.

In addition, the change method of the ratio of a probability variation symbol and a non-decision variation symbol is not restricted to the method of changing a display mode, and can be changed suitably.
For example, the display mode may not be changed, and any one of the non-probability symbols may be replaced with any one of the probability symbols. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the odd symbol is a probability symbol and the even symbol is a non-probability symbol, any one of the non-probability symbols (for example, the even symbol) It is also possible to replace “0”) with any one of the odd symbols (for example, odd symbol “1”) and display the odd symbol “1” instead of the non probable symbol “0” . In this case, since the types of displayable probability variation symbols do not change (the number of display probability variations increases) and the types of displayable non probability symbols decrease, the ratio of probability variation symbols to non probability variation symbols is Be changed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the "effect point control" and the "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control" described above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a symbol (non-probability change display mode) When changing the display mode of the probability variation pattern to the variation display mode, the result mode including the symbol (change target symbol) targeted for the change is stopped and displayed on the display device 41, and the symbol in the stop display (change target symbol) It is also possible to configure to change the display mode of the display mode from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode.
With this configuration, it is possible to notify (recognize) the player of the change in the display pattern of the identification symbol.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the "effect point control" and the "probability / non-probability symbol switching control" described above, a predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, A start storage means (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing a predetermined random number up to a predetermined upper limit number as a start memory is provided, and the effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) does not store the start memory in the start memory means Then, the effect mode of the effect is returned to the effect mode before the change, and the point application means (effect control apparatus 300) is configured to clear the applied points when the start memory is not stored in the start memory means. It is also possible.
That is, when the suspension is interrupted, the display mode of the even symbols switched to the probable variation symbols returns from the definite variation indication manner to the non-probability variation indication manner, and the ratio of the increased odd variation symbols returns to the original. Therefore, the player continues to fire the game ball so as not to interrupt the hold, so the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved.

  In addition, when there is a probability variation big hit with hold and the display mode of all identification symbols becomes a probability variation display mode, that is, when all identification symbols become probability variation symbols, there is no non-probability symbol, so the result of the game In the case of non-probability results, it is not possible to stop and display the result mode configured with non-probability symbols. Therefore, in this case, exceptionally, even if the second time point is not reached, the display mode of the even symbol switched to the probability variation symbol at the predetermined timing from the start to the end of the special gaming state is the probability variation display manner It is comprised so that it is possible to clear the number of acquisition points while returning to a non-probability change display mode from.

In addition, "reproduction point control" and "probability / non-probability symbol switching control" can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 10 but also to other gaming machines such as slot machines.
In addition, a "effect point control" function added password is made public on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer, etc., and when the password is inputted to the gaming machine, it is possible to perform "effect point control". It is good.
In addition, the "probable variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control" function added password is disclosed on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer etc., and the "probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control" is performed when the password is input to the gaming machine. May be configured to be possible.

Moreover, in this embodiment, when the identification symbol of blue is set as the non-probable variation symbol (non-probability variation confirmed symbol) and the identification symbol of blue is stopped and displayed, the probability variation state is not generated after the end of the special game state The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a blue identification symbol may be a chance symbol, and even if the blue identification symbol is stopped and displayed, there may be a probability change state after the end of the special game state.
That is, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing "effect point control" and "probability / non-probability symbol switching control" generates a probability variation state in which the probability that the result of the game is a special result is higher than the probability state. A generation means (game control device 100) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a variable display effect (decorative special view change display game) in which a plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed corresponding to the game. In the identification symbol, a symbol of the first display mode (for example, red) for clearly notifying that the probability variation state is generated by the probability variation state generation means and a probability variation state is generated by the probability variation state generation means And the symbol of the second display mode (for example, blue) for informing the user in an ambiguous manner, and the points awarded by the point awarding means (effect control device 300) reach the prescribed number Based on, it can be configured to change the ratio of the total number of symbols in the total number of symbols in the first display form the second display mode.
By configuring in this manner, the ratio between the total number of symbols in the first display mode and the total number of symbols in the second display mode changes by storing points, so that the player has an impression that the degree of expectation is changing. Can increase the interest of the game.

[Stage change control]
Next, “stage change control” that is the feature of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 76 shows an example of an effect stage that can be stayed in the normal gaming state.
FIG. 77 shows an example of BGM outputted in each of the effect stages and an example of effects executed in each of the effect stages.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the switching order of the effect stages.

In the present embodiment, when in the normal gaming state, “normal stage 1A” shown in FIG. 76 (a), “normal stage 1B” shown in FIG. 76 (b) and “normal stage 1B” shown in FIG. 76 (c). It is possible to stay on any one of the presentation stages among the “normal stage 2A”, the “normal stage 2B” shown in FIG. 76 (d), and the “special stage” shown in FIG. 76 (e).
The BGM outputted in each stage is respectively constituted by "intro-A melody-sabi-outro". In the example shown in FIG. 77 (a), the time values of BGM (that is, the length of one BGM track) are the same in the rendering stages other than the “special stage”, but the time values of BGM are different. May be The time value of BGM output in one rendering stage and the time value of the rendering image displayed in the one rendering stage are set to be substantially the same.

  When the stage control lottery is won by the stage change lottery, the period from "end of the chorus part to end of the BGM (that is, ending of the chorus part to end of the outro part) of the BGM (hereinafter" after the chorus part ") It is configured to perform the stage change (switching of the presentation stage) to “.” If the stage change is performed in front of the rust part or in the middle of the rust part, the player can not listen to the rust part. In particular, the player who is looking forward to the BGM (music) flowing during the game reduces the interest of the game, whereas, as in the present embodiment, the stage change "after the end of the climax part" By doing this, it is possible to make the player listen to at least the climax part, so it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced.

In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202938, switching of the effect stage is executed based on the result (pre-reading result etc.) of the variable display game, and for example, BGM outputting in the effect stage during stay. No consideration is given to (music) etc.
For example, when setting BGM (music) specific to each rendering stage, if switching of the rendering stage is executed based on the result of the variable display game, the BGM (music) being output will be interrupted, and switching of the rendering stage At times, a feeling of fraying of BGM (musical music) occurs, causing the player to feel unpleasant.
In particular, BGMs (musical pieces) specific to models are very important for players who are playing games with an interest in the model of the gaming machine and the contents of the presentation (in particular, those of the copyright), and want to listen to everything as much as possible. There is a demand that you want to listen properly to the point where Kiri is good.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in particular, for the player who is interested in the BGM (music) specific to the model and playing a game, the point is to “make the BGM (music) properly enjoy” which has not been considered up to now. I put a weight on the stage (mainly, stage switching) to perform.

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), in each of the production stages, the special notice effects (main notice, sub-notice, notice of dance things etc.) unique to the effect stage can appear, and common notice effects can also appear. There is.
If a notice effect specific to the effect stage is being executed, the stage change may not be performed even at the stage changeable timing (in the case of this embodiment, any timing after “the end of the chorus portion”). The stage change may be performed by switching the advance notice specific to the stage being executed to the common notice effect if it is possible to switch to the common notice effect. However, if the number of points acquired changes as a result of switching to the common preliminary announcement effect, priority is given to the preliminary announcement effect of the person who is not switched or who has a large number of acquired points.

In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the stage based on the number of points acquired, the frequency of appearance, or the like, with reference to the content of the advance notice effect that has been determined in advance.
Further, for example, as SP reach production, SP stage production unique to the production stage and SP reach production common to the production stage are provided, and when performing stage change before SP reach development, the development destination is referred to and a predetermined condition is satisfied. If it develops into an SP reach (for example, an SP reach effect with a high number of acquired points and an SP reach effect unique to the effect stage), the SP reach may be developed without performing the stage change.

The effect control device 300 is configured to perform a stage change lottery every time when the variable display of the special figure fluctuation display game is started, and to shift to the next normal stage when the lottery is won. Further, when the stage change lottery is not won by the time the automatic switching condition is satisfied, the stage is shifted to the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition is satisfied.
Here, in the present embodiment, the condition (hereinafter referred to as “condition A”) that the number of repetitions of one BGM song has reached a preset number of loops (see FIG. 77A), and the number of fluctuations. The automatic switching condition is set when one of the conditions (hereinafter referred to as “condition B”) that the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game has reached a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as “condition B”) is satisfied. It is assumed that it is established. It should be noted that the automatic switching condition may be determined to be satisfied only when the condition A is satisfied without considering the condition B, or the automatic switching may be performed only when the condition B is satisfied without considering the condition A. It may be determined that the condition is satisfied. Of course, other conditions may be used as the automatic switching conditions.

Specifically, first, "process A" is performed. In “Process A”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, in “Normal Stage 1A (Sea Sea Stage)”, a stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change, and special stage change is made. If it wins the lottery, it shifts to the "special stage (flamed stage)", and if it wins the regular stage change lottery, it shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 1 B (cloudy stage)" . On the other hand, in the "normal stage 1A (seaslide stage)", the stage change lottery is won by the time the automatic switching line conditions for the normal stage 1A (in the case of this embodiment, 1 song x 3 times or 30 fluctuations) are satisfied If not, when the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A is satisfied, the process shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 1B (cloudy stage)".
In the case of transition from “normal stage 1A (sea-mass stage)” to “special stage (flame upper stage)”, automatic switching conditions (for the present embodiment) for the special stage in “special stage (flame upper stage)” In the case, when one song × 2 times or 20 fluctuations) is established, the process shifts to the next normal stage “normal stage 1 B (cloudy stage)”.

Next, "process B" is performed. In “Process B”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, in “Normal Stage 1 B (cloud stage)”, stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change, and special stage change is performed. If it wins the lottery, it shifts to the "special stage (flame stage)", and if it wins the regular stage change lottery, it shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 2A (mountain stage)" . On the other hand, in the "normal stage 1B (cloudy stage)", the stage change lottery is not won by the time the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1B (in the case of this embodiment, 1 song x 3 times or 30 movements) is satisfied. In this case, when the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1B is satisfied, the process shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 2A (mountain stage)".
In the case of transition from “normal stage 1 B (cloudy stage)” to “special stage (flame upper stage)”, “normal stage 2 A, which is the next normal stage when automatic switching conditions for special stages are satisfied” Move to (Yamayama Stage).

Then "process C" is performed. In “Process C”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, in “Normal Stage 2A (Mountain Stage)”, stage change lottery (Normal stage change lottery and Special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change, and special stage change is performed. If it wins the lottery, it shifts to the "special stage (flamed stage)", and if it wins the regular stage change lottery, it shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 1A (sea sea stage)" . On the other hand, in the "normal stage 2A (mountain stage)", the stage change lottery is not won by the time the automatic switching condition for normal stage 2A (in the case of this embodiment, 1 song × 2 times or 30 movements) is satisfied. In this case, when the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 2A is satisfied, the process shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 1A (seaweed stage)".
In the case of transition from “normal stage 2A (mountain stage)” to “special stage (flame upper stage)”, “normal stage 1A which is the next normal stage when automatic switching conditions for the special stage are satisfied” Move to the (sea and sea stage).

Next, "process D" is performed. In "Process D", for example, as shown in FIG. 78, stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change in "normal stage 1A (sea sea stage)", and special stage change is performed. If it wins the lottery, it shifts to the "special stage (flamed stage)", and if it wins the regular stage change lottery, it shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 1 B (cloudy stage)" . On the other hand, when the stage change lottery is not won before the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A is satisfied in the "normal stage 1A (sea tuna stage)", the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A is satisfied. At the point of time, it shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 1B (cloudy stage)".
In the case of transition from "normal stage 1A (sea-warming stage)" to "special stage (flame upper stage)", "normal stage 1B" is the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied. Move to (cloudy stage).

Then "process E" is performed. In “Process E”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, in “Normal Stage 1 B (cloudy stage)”, stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change, and special stage change If it wins the lottery, it shifts to the "special stage (flame stage)", and if it wins the regular stage change lottery, it shifts to the next normal stage "normal stage 2A (mountain stage)" . On the other hand, in the "normal stage 1B (cloudy stage)", when the stage change lottery is not won before the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1B is satisfied, the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1B is satisfied. At this point, the stage moves on to the next normal stage "normal stage 2B (also peach stage)".
In the case of transition from “normal stage 1 B (cloudy stage)” to “special stage (flame upper stage)”, “normal stage 2 B” is the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied. (Momo peach stage) to "".

Then, "process F" is performed. In “Process F”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change in “normal stage 2B (peach peach stage)”. If you win the change lottery, it shifts to the "special stage (flamed stage)", and if you win the normal stage change lottery, it shifts to the next normal stage, "the normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)" Do. On the other hand, in the "normal stage 2B (peach peach stage)", the stage change lottery is won by the time the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 2B (one song × 2 times or 30 fluctuations in the case of this embodiment) is satisfied. If not, when the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 2B is satisfied, the process shifts to the next normal stage “normal stage 1A (seaweed stage)”, and returns to “process A”.
In the case of transition from “normal stage 2 B (peach peach stage)” to “special stage (flame stage)”, “normal stage” is the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied. Move to 1A (sea and sea stage), and return to “process A”.

In other words, “Process A: Normal stage 1A (→ special stage)” → “Process B: Normal stage 1 B (→ special stage)” → “Process C: Normal stage 2 A (→ special stage)” → “Process D: Normal stage 1A (→ special stage) → “process E: normal stage 1 B (→ special stage)” → “process F: normal stage 2 B (→ special stage)” → “process A: normal stage 1 A (→ special stage)” → Switching of the presentation stage is performed in the order of.
In addition, when it has developed to SP reach while staying in one of the production stages, the SP reach production is inserted, and flows from the gaming machine even at timings other than the stage changeable timing. B) BGM switches from BGM corresponding to the one presentation stage to BGM corresponding to SP reach. Then, when the result of the SP reach is deviated, after the result mode of the disengagement is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to the next normal stage of the one effect stage.

FIG. 79 shows a timing chart for explaining an example of “stage change control” in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 79, each time the variable display of the special view variable display game starts, a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery are performed as a stage change lottery.
When the stage change lottery is won at a timing other than the stage change enable timing, the stage change is waited until the stage change enable timing is reached. In the example shown in FIG. 79, since the special stage change lottery is won in the middle of the intro part, ie, the special stage change lottery is won before the end of the chorus part, until the latest stage changeable timing (that is, the chorus part ends) Wait for stage change, and when the climax part is over, it shifts to the "special stage (flame stage)".

Then, in the “special stage (flame stage)”, the stage change lottery is not performed, and when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied, the process shifts to the next normal stage.
As the stage change lottery, two lottery of a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery are performed, but when both lotterys are simultaneously won, one lottery result is prioritized.

Note that the probability of winning a normal stage change and the probability of winning a special stage change may be the same or different, but it is more special round than the probability of winning a normal stage change. Lowering the probability of winning can give a special feeling to the transition to the special stage.
It is also possible to configure to shift to a special stage based on the pre-read result. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the special stage.
Further, in the present embodiment, as the stage change lottery, two lottery of the normal stage change lottery and the special stage change lottery are performed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. One lottery may be performed including both the result of winning the change and the result of the lottery.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 80 to FIG. 82, a special stage change lottery (winning probability: 1/200, for example) is performed at the start of each change, and the special stage change lottery has not won In that case, a normal stage change lottery (winning probability: 1/2, for example) is performed when the automatic switching condition is established, and when the normal stage change lottery is won, the process shifts to the next normal stage, It is also possible to configure so as not to shift to the next normal stage when the stage change lottery is not won.

Specifically, first, a special stage change lottery is performed every time when the variable display of the special view variable display game is started in the “normal stage 1A (sea sea stage)”.
Then, as shown in FIG. 80, when the special stage change lottery is not won by the time the automatic switching condition (for example, one song × 3 times) for the normal stage 1A is satisfied, the automatic for the normal stage 1A is performed. When the switching condition is satisfied, the normal stage change lottery is performed, and when the normal stage change lottery is won, the process shifts to the next normal stage (for example, a cloud stage). On the other hand, when the win is not won in the normal stage change lottery, the same process is repeated while staying on the “normal stage 1A (sea sea stage)” without shifting to the next normal stage.

On the other hand, when the special stage change lottery is won before the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A is satisfied, the process shifts to the special stage.
In the example shown in FIG. 82, since the special stage change lottery was won in the middle of the intro part, that is, the special stage change lottery was won before the end of the chorus part, until the latest stage changeable timing (that is, the chorus part ends) Wait for stage change, and when the climax part is over, it shifts to the "special stage (flame stage)".
In the example shown in FIG. 81, since a special stage change lottery was won in the middle of the outro part, that is, a special stage change lottery was won after the end of the chorus part, "special stage (flame stage)" without waiting for stage change. Is moving to

  In FIG. 79 and FIG. 82, the stage change lottery is won in the middle of the second intro portion in the “normal stage 1A (seasickness stage)”, and is waiting for the stage change until the second rust portion ends. In this case, since the first chorus part (first chorus part) is finished when the stage change lottery is won, it is not necessary to wait for the stage change until the second chorus part is finished. That is, if at least the first chorus portion has ended, stage change may be performed without waiting.

In one normal stage, it is possible to configure so that the probability of winning a stage change is increased each time the number of repetitions of BGM increases.
Moreover, it is also possible to differ the probability of winning a stage change according to the pre-reading result. Specifically, for example, in the case where a special map start memory in which the result is a "big hit" is stored, the probability of winning a stage change can be configured to be higher than in other cases. It is.
In addition, the stage change lottery may be performed only at the stage change possible timing (in the case of the present embodiment, “after the end of the hook portion”).

According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “stage change control” described above, a plurality of effect stages can be provided to the gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value to the player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined special result. Provided with effect stage control means (effect control device 300) capable of outputting music (BGM) corresponding to the selected effect stage from the speakers 19a and 19b while setting the effect stage selected from among The control means determines a switchable timing (a stage changeable timing) at which switching of the rendering stage is possible based on the progress status of the music, and switches the rendering stage at the determined switchable timing.
Therefore, since the effect stage can be switched in consideration of the progress of the music being output, the interest of the game can be enhanced.
The "music" may be accompanied by a singing voice or may not be accompanied by a singing voice.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the "stage change control" described above, the effect stage control means (effect control device 300) performs switching lottery whether or not to switch the effect stage (stage change lottery) If the player wins the switching lottery at the switchable timing (the stage changeable timing), the effect stage is switched when the player wins, and if the switching lottery is won before the switchable timing, It is possible to configure to wait for switching of the effect stage until the switchable timing is reached.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the music from being hit by switching of the presentation stage (stage change), and hence the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the "stage change control" described above, the effect stage control means (effect control device 300) repeatedly outputs the music corresponding to the selected effect stage from the speakers 19a and 19b. If it is not possible to win the switching lottery before the number of repetitions of the music reaches the specified number (loop number), when the number of repetitions of the music reaches the specified number, It is possible to configure for switching.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the user from staying on the same rendering stage. Therefore, since the player can listen to various music (music corresponding to various presentation stages), the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The “stage change control” is applicable not only to the pachinko gaming machine 10 but also to other gaming machines such as slot machines.
In addition, the “Stage change control” function added password is disclosed on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer, etc., and it is configured that “stage change control” can be performed when the password is input to the gaming machine. It is good.
In addition, the stage change mode switching password is disclosed on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer, etc., and when the password is input to the gaming machine, the type of the presentation stage, the grade of the presentation stage, the winning probability of the stage change lottery, etc. are changed. It may be configured to Furthermore, different stage change mode switching passwords can be used every predetermined period, so that the type of effect stage, the grade of the effect stage, the winning probability of the stage change lottery, etc. can be changed according to each period. Also good.

[Watch feature presentation]
Next, the “watch feature presentation” that is featured by the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, there is a watch character part 44d1 imitating a watch, and a support member 44d2 having a clock part 44d1 at its tip (free end). A panel effect device 44d is provided. The panel effect device 44 d is between the first position (see FIG. 3) where the watch character part 44 d 1 does not overlap the display area of the display device 41 and the second position (see FIG. 2) overlapping the display area of the display device 41. In order to move the support member 44 d 2, it is possible to rotate the support member 44 d 2 and to rotate the hands of the watch part 44 d 1.

FIGS. 83 to 85 are diagrams for explaining an example of the “watch part effect effect” in the present embodiment. In FIG. 83 to FIG. 85, “watch feature presentation” is executed as one aspect of the reach presentation.
As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the display 41 displays the year display H3 indicating the year, and the board effect device In particular, the watch character part 44d1 is moved back and forth between the first position and the third position closer to the second position than the first position. An effect is given to the player's sense of expectation for the movement of 44d1 to the second position. Further, in response to the turning operation effect, the effect display H4 is displayed in a portion (in this example, the lower left portion) in the vicinity of the clock part 44d1 in the display area of the display device 41. It is also possible to indicate the degree of expectation or the like to be a big hit by the display mode (color, size, etc.) of the effect display H4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), the watch character part 44d1 moves from the first position to the second position, and in the second position (that is, in the state where the clock part 44d1 is in front of the display area). ) A rotating effect is performed in which the hands of the clock part 44d1 rotate in the counterclockwise direction. Also, in response to this rotation effect, a display effect is performed in which the year of the year display H3 goes back.
Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the year of the year display H3 goes back from the present (current year) to the closest first stage year.
If the stage does not go up any more, after the watch character part 44d1 returns from the second position to the first position, the display on the display device 41 changes, and the SP reach corresponding to the year of the first stage To develop.

On the other hand, if the stage is further up, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), after the watch role part 44d1 returns from the second position to the first position, the SP reach corresponding to the year of the first stage Without being developed (or after being developed to the SP reach corresponding to the year of the first stage), the roll operation presentation by the board presentation device 44 d is performed again.
Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the clock effect part 44d1 moves from the first position to the second position, and the hand of the clock part 44d1 rotates in the counterclockwise direction at the second position. Is done. Also, in response to this rotation effect, a display effect is performed in which the year of the year display H3 goes back.
Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the year of the year display H3 goes back to the year of the second stage, which is closer to the present after the first stage.
If the stage does not go up any more, after the watch character part 44d1 returns from the second position to the first position, the display on the display device 41 changes as shown in FIG. 85 (c). Develop an SP reach corresponding to the two-stage year (for example, an SP reach having a higher expectation than the SP reach corresponding to the year of the first stage).

On the other hand, when the stage is further up, after the watch character part 44d1 returns from the second position to the first position, it does not develop into the SP reach corresponding to the year of the second stage (or the second After the development to the SP reach corresponding to the year of the stage), the roll operation production by the board production device 44d is performed again.
Then, the above operation is performed up to the set stage, and the corresponding SP reach is developed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 86, the effect of causing the player's operation to intervene as a rotational effect in which the hands of the watch character part 44d1 rotate in a counterclockwise direction and a display effect in which the year of the year display H3 goes back. It is also possible to do.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the watch character part 44d1 moves from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550. Operation instruction display H51 instructing to perform a touch operation to sequentially trace in the counterclockwise direction eight points other than the “TSW4” points provided on the screen, and an effective period display indicating the remaining time until the effective period of the touch operation ends H52 is displayed on the display device 41.
Then, when the player performs the touch operation as instructed, as shown in FIG. 86C, a rotation effect is performed in which the hands of the watch role part 44d1 rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the year display H3 Display effects are performed with the year of the year going back.

In this case, the amount of change of the needle or year (the amount of rotation of the needle or the amount of retrogression of the year) may correspond to, for example, the touch operation duration time or the touch operation amount within the valid period. It may be made to respond to the result and fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game).
In addition, the change mode of the needle or year (how to rotate the needle or how to go back to the year) can be set as appropriate. For example, even if the touch operation is continued, it is not changed initially ( That is, there may be a change mode such as changing the amount of change to a predetermined change amount or the like when the touch operation is continued for a predetermined period, without performing the rotation effect of rotating the hand or the display effect of returning the year.

Further, for example, an instruction display such as “Rewind to the ○ age!” Appears on the display device 41, and when the touch operation is continued for a predetermined period, change to the time (that is, 時代 era) It is also possible to
Moreover, it is also possible to add the point according to the amount of change of the hand or the year to the number of points by combining the "watch character feature effect" and the above-mentioned "effect point control". That is, in addition to (or in place of) when the touch operation on effect operation unit 550 continues the predetermined condition satisfaction time, when the touch operation according to operation instruction display H51 continues, button operation for point addition is continued May be treated as

Moreover, it is also possible to perform an effect as shown in FIG. 87-FIG. 91 as a "watch character feature effect." In FIG. 87 to FIG. 91, the effect of counting the remaining time until the start of the predetermined effect (in this example, the temporary stop display effect for displaying the special symbol temporary stop display (swing display at the fixed position)) is executed There is.
As shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started, points are added to the number of points. Further, when start storage of the special view variation display game accompanied by temporary stop display effect is generated and the result of pre-reading of the start storage is notified from the game control device 100, read ahead decoration special view start storage display H6 corresponding to the start storage Is displayed in the undigested start memory display area R1. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading decoration special figure start memory display H6 is configured to be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the other decoration special drawing start memory display (for example, different color, presence or absence of rocking display) ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the prefetching special drawing start memory display H6 is broken at a predetermined timing (at the timing when the result of the variation being executed is stopped and displayed in the case of this example), The timer display H7 for notifying the remaining time until the start of the temporary stop display effect of the variable display game based on the read-ahead decoration special figure start memory is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the next variable display Updating of the timer display H7 (counting down in this example) is started from the start of game fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the update of the timer display H7 is continued even if the special view start memory is digested and the display position of the preread decorative special view start memory display H6 is shifted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the special view variation display game based on the start memory corresponding to the preliminary reading decoration special view start memory display H6 is started, the preliminary read special decoration start memory display H6 is undigested start memory display While moving from the area R1 to the variable start storage display area R3, the timer display H7 moves to a position away from the read ahead decoration special view start storage display H6 and is enlarged and displayed in the enlarged display. Updated with the progress of
Next, as shown in FIG. 88C, when the remaining time notified by the timer display H7 reaches a predetermined time, reach occurs. Then, even while the reach is occurring, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the update of the timer display H7 is continued.

If the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is not a pattern that develops to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the timer display H7 times out, a temporary stop display effect is performed, and the panel effect device 44d A roaring motion effect is performed. Further, in response to the turning operation effect, the effect display H4 is displayed in a portion (in this example, the lower left portion) in the vicinity of the clock part 44d1 in the display area of the display device 41.
Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the turning operation effect by the panel effect device 44d is ended, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed (finalized display), and the fluctuation is ended, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is performed. Will start.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is a pattern that develops to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the timer display H7 times out, a temporary stop display effect is performed, and a board effect is produced. The turning operation effect is performed by the device 44d. Further, the effect display H4 is displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to the turning operation effect.
Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the rotation effect is such that the watch part 44d1 moves from the first position to the second position, and the hand of the watch part 44d1 rotates in the counterclockwise direction at the second position. Is done.
Then, as shown in FIG. 90C, an operation instruction display H51 instructing to perform a touch operation to trace the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550, and an effective period display H52 indicating the remaining time until the effective period of the touch operation ends. And are displayed on the display device 41.

Then, when the player performs the touch operation as instructed, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), a rotation effect is performed in which the hands of the watch role part 44d1 rotate counterclockwise, and the timer display H7 is performed. A display effect is given at which time goes back. Thereafter, when the effective period of the touch operation has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the timer value H7 displays a time value (“60:00” in this example) corresponding to the result of the fluctuation or the like. Be done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), after the notification effect of notifying the development to the SP reach is performed, the SP develop is performed.
In addition, when the player does not perform the touch operation as instructed, the time value corresponding to the result of the fluctuation or the like is not displayed as the timer display H7 (that is, “00:00” is displayed. ), An announcement effect to notify the development to the SP reach is performed, and develops to the SP reach.

  Here, in the patterns shown in FIGS. 87 to 91, the timer display H7 displayed at a position away from the corresponding look-ahead ornament special drawing start storage display H6 (that is, displayed during the execution of the corresponding special drawing variation display game Although only the current timer display H7) is configured to be able to be changed according to the touch operation, for example, the timer display H7 displayed at a position close to the corresponding look-ahead That is, the timer display H7) displayed during the execution of the special view change display game executed prior to the corresponding special view change display game can also be changed according to the touch operation. You may.

  In addition, it is also possible not only to return time but to advance time by touch operation which traces the upper surface of the effect operation part 550. In this case, for example, when the direction of the touch operation is a counterclockwise direction, the time may be returned, and when the direction of the touch operation is a clockwise direction, the time may be advanced. In addition, it is also possible to grant special effects such as appearance of special effects by advancing time by touch operation.

  Further, it is also possible to change the speed of the rotation effect or the display effect according to the speed of the touch operation tracing the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (that is, the speed of tracing the upper surface). Specifically, for example, when the speed of the touch operation is within a predetermined speed range, the display of the hands of the watch character part 44d1 and the display on the display device 41 moves at the normal speed, and the speed of the touch operation is predetermined. When the speed is below the speed range, the hands of the watch character part 44d1 and the display on the display device 41 become slow motion slower than the normal speed, and when the speed of the touch operation is above the predetermined speed range, the clock It is also possible to configure the display of the hands of the character part 44d1 and the display on the display device 41 to be quick motion faster than the normal speed.

Further, in the present embodiment, “watch effect presentation” is performed as reach presentation and presentation to count the remaining time until start of a predetermined presentation, but other presentation ) May be performed as “watch feature presentation”.
Further, in the present embodiment, the "clock product effect" is performed as the effect relating to the change, but the "clock product effect" may be performed over a plurality of changes.
In addition, as a "watch character feature effect", effects are produced based on a series of stories in one variable display game, and the progress of this story is interlocked with the movement of the board effect device 44d and the movement of the hands of the watch character part 44d1. You may Specifically, for example, when the effect continues until the story ends (that is, when the effect continues until the maximum effect time) and when the effect ends in the middle of the story (that is, the effect time is greater than the maximum effect time Also, if the presentation time is shorter, the degree of expectation is lower as the presentation time is shorter, and if the presentation continues up to the maximum presentation time, a big hit is made. Then, the movement of the board effect device 44d gives the player a sense of expectation for the continuation of the effect up to the maximum effect time, or counts up the time from the start of the effect by the hands of the watch role part 44d. The player may be notified whether the effect continues until the effect time.
Further, although a character imitating an analog timepiece is used as the timepiece character portion 44d1, the invention is not limited thereto, and it is possible to use a character imitating a digital timepiece as the timepiece character portion 44d1.

  Further, in the patterns shown in FIG. 87 to FIG. 91, a character imitating an analog clock is used as the clock part 44d1, and a time value is displayed on the display device 41 as a timer display H7 like a digital clock . That is, in addition to adopting an analog watch as a feature and a digital watch as a display, the present invention is not limited to this, a digital watch as a feature and an analog watch as a display Also, a digital clock may be adopted as both of the object and the display, or an analog clock may be adopted as both of the object and the display.

According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “watch character product effect” described above, in the gaming machine capable of giving the gaming value to the player when the game result is a predetermined special result, the display device 41 Is provided with the effect control device 300 for controlling the display effect in and the action effect in the movable effect member (panel effect device 44d), and the effect control device 300 can execute effects interlocked with each other in the display device 41 and the movable effect member It is configured to be.
Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the feature and the display are interlocked, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “watch character object effect” described above, the effect operation unit 550 capable of detecting the touch operation in the counterclockwise direction by the player and the touch operation in the clockwise direction is provided. The movable effect member (panel effect device 44d) is a character imitating a clock, and the effect control device 300 operates the movable effect member (panel effect device 44d) according to the direction of the player's touch operation. The time indicated by the movable effect member can be changed, and the timer display H7 is displayed on the display device 41, and the time indicated by the timer display H7 is changed according to the direction of the player's touch operation. It is also possible to configure so as to be able to.
That is, in accordance with the touch operation of tracing the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550, the hands of the clock of the watch character (panel effect device 44d) are rotated or the time displayed on the display device 41 is returned Since it is possible to advance the game, it is possible to give the player the impression that his / her operation is directly involved in the game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

The “watch feature presentation” is applicable not only to the pachinko gaming machine 10 but also to other gaming machines such as slot machines.
In addition, it is possible to release "watch role feature effect" function added password on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer etc., and to perform "watch feature effect effect" when the password is input to the gaming machine. You may configure.

[Probable / Little Hit Production]
Next, the “probable / small hitting effect” that is the feature of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, a battle effect in which the main character (self character) and the enemy character fight is executed. Specifically, first, a battle effect as an effect during fluctuation is performed during the execution of the target figure fluctuation display game. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is 16R big hit (16R normal big hit, 16 probability variation big hit), the victory effect where the main character wins in the battle production appears, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is 16R big hit In other cases (that is, in the case of a break, a small hit, or a sudden (2R probability variation big hit)), a defeat effect in which the main character loses in the corresponding battle effect appears.

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is sudden or small hitting, after the defeat production appears in the battle production as the production during fluctuation, during special game state (including small hitting game state), “ / Performs battle production as "small hit production". When the result is a surprise, a victory effect appears in the battle effect, and when the result is a small hit, a defeat effect appears in the battle effect.

FIG. 92 is a diagram for describing an example of battle rendition in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (c), the common battle start effect appears first regardless of the result of the battle effect (whether the victory effect appears or the defeat effect appears). At the time of the battle start effect, a display that suggests the result of the battle effect (specifically, changing the weapon of the main character, the background, the character that starts the attack, etc.) may be performed.
Next, an attack pattern A (jump and kick) effect is produced as shown in FIG. 92 (d), or an attack pattern B (punch) effect is produced as shown in FIG. 92 (e). A plurality of types of attack pattern effects may be provided, and the degree of expectation may be suggested depending on which attack pattern effect appears.

Next, when the attack pattern A effect appears, a victory effect as shown in FIGS. 92 (f) and 92 (g) or a defeat effect as shown in FIGS. 92 (h) and 92 (i).
When an attack pattern B effect appears, a victory effect as shown in FIGS. 92 (j) and 92 (k) or a defeat effect as shown in FIGS. 92 (l) and 92 (m).
In FIGS. 92 (d) to 92 (m), the display of the variable display game with the decorative special symbol is omitted for convenience, but FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b) and FIG. 92 (d) to FIG. Similarly, a variation display game with a decorative special symbol is displayed in the upper right portion or the like of the display area of the display device 41. The same applies to FIGS. 93 to 96.

FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the case where the target figure variation display game result is 16R big hit (16R normal big hit, 16 probability variation big hit), and (a) is a figure showing an example of display , (B) is an example of a timing chart.
As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b), the effect control device 300 performs a battle effect as a variable effect during the execution of the target figure variable display game. When a victory effect appears in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), after the battle effect, during the special game state, during the special gaming state, the jackpot effect (fanfare effect, round effect, interval effect, and ending effect) )I do.

Note that the jackpot effect may be an effect related to a battle effect or may be an effect not related to the battle effect.
In addition, it is also possible to perform a battle effect as an effect of notifying whether or not the special gaming state (round game) continues for each predetermined round by providing a plurality of types of big hit (16R big hit, 12R big hit, 4R big hit etc.) It is. Specifically, for example, the battle effect is executed in the fourth round, and when the special game state continues, a victory effect is made to appear in the battle effect, and when it is not continued, a defeat effect is made to appear in the battle effect. It is also possible.
Also, in the final round or the like, it is also possible to perform a battle effect as an effect to notify whether or not a probability change big hit occurs. Specifically, for example, when there is a probability variation big hit retention (that is, a special figure start memory whose result is a “probability variation big hit”) in undivided suspension, the strongest attack pattern rendition among a plurality of attack patterns It is also possible to perform battle rendition, such as causing a victory rendition to appear, after the c.

FIG. 94 is a view for explaining the case where the result of the special view variation display game to be targeted is a sudden (2R probability variation big hit), and (a) and (b) are views showing an example of display, (C) is an example of a timing chart.
As shown in FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (c), the effect control device 300 performs a battle effect as an effect during fluctuation during the execution of the target figure fluctuation display game, and a defeat effect appears in the battle effect. If the result of the special view variation display game to be targeted is a certainty, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) and (c), after the battle effect, the special Perform a battle effect (fanfare effect, round effect, interval effect, and ending effect) as “/ small hit effect (specifically, sudden effect)”.

Then, when the result of the target figure variation display game to be targeted is a certainty, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) and (c), a victory effect is made to appear in the battle effect. Thereby, it can be informed that the result of the special-figure variation display game to be targeted is accurate, that is, the high probability state will occur after the end of the special game state.
In addition, in the second battle production (battle production as “probable / small hit production”), for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the leading character such as “still still!” Is revived at the beginning of the battle start production You may display an indication that you did. Also, the enemy character of the first battle effect (a battle effect as an effect during fluctuation) may be different from the enemy character of the second battle effect (a battle effect as “probable / small hitting effect”).
Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (b) and FIG. 94 (b), in the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the big hit operation is finished, the big hit probability state always becomes the high probability state (that is, the fixed number of rotations) Special time (ST) occurs in which only the high probability state is set, but it is not limited to this, and when the big hit operation ends, the big hit probability state becomes high probability state and high probability state It may be a specification that does not have cases.

FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the case where the result of the special-figure variation display game to be targeted is a small hit, where (a) and (b) show an example of display, and (c) is an illustration. It is an example of a timing chart.
As shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (c), the effect control device 300 performs a battle effect as an effect during fluctuation during the execution of the target figure fluctuation display game, and a defeat effect appears in the battle effect. If the result of the special view variation display game to be targeted is a small hit, as shown in FIGS. 95 (b) and (c), after the battle effect, during the special game state, “ A battle effect (fanfare effect, round effect, interval effect, and ending effect) is performed as a “certain probability / small hit effect (specifically, small hit effect)”.

Then, when the result of the special view variation display game to be targeted is a small hit, as shown in FIGS. 95 (b) and (c), a defeat effect is made to appear in the battle effect. As a result, it can be informed that the result of the target special view variation display game is a small hit, that is, that the high probability state will not occur after the end of the special game state.
Here, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the result of the target special view change display game is a small hit, and the special time in the target special view change display game is the target. If the jackpot probability state in the target figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big hit at the end of the target figure variation display game (that is, time t1) The probability state of switches to the low probability state.
The timing at which the result of the battle effect (the victory effect or the defeat effect) appears may be different between the case of winning in the battle effect and the case of losing the effect. Specifically, when the result of the target figure variation display game targeted is a small hit, a defeat effect appears in the battle effect as “probable / small hit representation (small hit effect)”, and the target figure variation targeted When the result of the display game is sudden, a victory effect appears in the battle effect as “probable / small hit effect (imprecise effect)”. For example, the time from the start of the battle effect to the appearance of the defeat effect is a battle effect It is also possible to make it shorter than the time until the victory effect appears from the start of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96, it is also possible to cause a draw effect to appear in addition to the win effect and the defeat effect.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 96, it is also possible to perform battle rendition during the execution of the special view variation display game which is started before the target special view variation display game.

  FIG. 96 shows an example of a case where a special view start memory whose result is “16R big hit” is generated, and a variable display game based on the special view start memory is targeted. In this example, first, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (d), a battle effect is performed during the execution of the special feature variation display game which is started two before the target special feature variation display game. The draw effect appears in the battle effect, and then, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the execution of the special view change display game started one before the target special view change display game During the battle production is performed, a draw production has appeared in the battle production. Next, as shown in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), a battle effect as an effect during fluctuation is performed during the execution of the special feature fluctuation display game to be targeted, and a victory effect appears in the battle effect, and then As shown in FIG. 96 (d), after the battle effect, the jackpot effect is executed during the special game state.

Although FIG. 96 shows the case where the target figure variation display game result is 16R big hit, the draw effect is made to appear even when the target figure variation display game result is other than 16R big hit. Alternatively, the battle effect may be performed during the execution of the special view variation display game started before the target special view variation display game.
Moreover, in FIG. 96, although the result of two or more continuous battle effects showed the pattern used as a "draw-draw-victory", it is not limited to this, The pattern of the result of two or more continuous battle effects is Result of battle rendition (Battle rendition as fluctuation during rendition) performed during the execution of the special view change display game targeted, or battle rendition performed when defeat rendition appears in the battle rendition If the result of the battle effect as “the result of the battle effect display” corresponds to the result of the target figure variation display game, it can be appropriately changed.

According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “probable / small hitting effect” described above, in the gaming machine capable of giving the gaming value to the player when the game result is a predetermined special result, The special result includes the first special result (in the case of the present embodiment, the 16R big hit), the second special result (in the case of the present embodiment, the probability), and the third special result (this case). In the case of the embodiment, the effect control device 300 performs the first effect (in the case of the present embodiment, a battle effect as an effect during variation) during the game execution, and the result of the game is included. Indicates whether or not the first special result, and if the result of the game is the second special result or the third special result, the second effect associated with the first effect after the first effect ( In the case of the present embodiment, the bar as the “probable / small hitting effect” Le presentation) performed suggest how the game result is the third special result whether the second special results.
Therefore, when a hit occurs (when the result of the game is a special result), since it is possible to perform relevant rendition along the flow of rendition, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “probable / small hitting effect” described above, when the game result is the second special result (in the case of the present embodiment, the probability), the special winning opening (special A special gaming state occurs in which the variable winning device 38) opens with a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and after the special gaming state is over, the probability that the result of the game becomes a special result is higher than the probability state. If the result of the game is the third special result (in the case of this embodiment, a small hit), a special gaming state in which the special winning opening opens with the predetermined opening / closing pattern occurs, and the special gaming state After termination, it is possible to configure so that a positive change does not occur.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to indicate whether or not a positive change state occurs after the end of the special game state by the second effect (battle effect as “probable / small hit effect”), It can enhance interest.
Note that the first special result is not limited to the 16R jackpot, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second special result is not limited to a certainty, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the third special result is not limited to the small hit, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “probable / small hitting effect” described above, the effect control device 300 is started prior to the game performing the first effect (the battle effect as the fluctuating effect). During the execution of one or more games, it is possible to configure to perform a related effect (battle effect) related to the first effect.
By configuring in this way, effects related to each other can be performed across a plurality of games, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 including the processing for enabling the effect as described above will be described. Control processing by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes main processing shown in FIG. 97 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main processing, as shown in FIG. 97, processing at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, the interrupt is first inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect operation unit 550 (effect button 25 or touch panel 29). Reading of the input from the effect operation unit 550 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect operation unit 550, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

Next, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as setting of changeable range such as brightness of LED or liquid crystal, volume, etc., change of brightness of LED or liquid crystal, volume by player, enabling setting, etc. (Step C10).
Next, the effect point control process (step C11) and the stage change control process (step C12) are performed to perform the random number update process (step C13) for updating the random numbers for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special game variation display game .

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C14) for taking action is performed, and a presentation display editing process (step C15) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the presentation and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C16). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem. The designation of the display pattern of the even symbols is performed in the effect display editing process (step C15).

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C17). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C17 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C17; N), the processing in step C17 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C17 that it is the frame switching timing (step C17; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C18).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C19) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step C19) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C20) A movable body control process (step C21) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Effect point control processing]
Next, details of the effect point control process (step C11) in the main process described above will be described. By the above-mentioned "effect point control", the variation start of the decoration special figure variation display game, the pre-reading effect execution of the point addition target execution time, the relevant fluctuation presentation execution target of the point addition target execution time, the button operation target continuation point operation When it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied when the number of points acquired reaches the bonus target value, predetermined points are added to the number of points, but in this effect point control process, the points are determined. Perform the addition of

As shown in FIG. 98, in the effect point control process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start time of the decorative feature variation display game on the display device 41 is started (step C101).
If it is determined in step C101 that the variation start time of the decorative feature variation display game is not started (step C101; N), the processing proceeds to step C103.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C101 that the variation start time of the decorative special feature variation display game is started (step C101; Y), it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and the variation start point (in the present embodiment) In the case, one point (see FIG. 66 (c)) is added to the number of points (step C102).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect execution of the point addition target is performed (step C103).
When it is determined in step C103 that it is not at the time of execution of the pre-reading effect of the point addition target (step C103; N), the process proceeds to step C105.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C103 that pre-reading effect execution of point addition target is executed (step C103; Y), it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and points corresponding to the effect are added to the number of points (Step C104).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation effect of the point addition target is being executed (step C105).
When it is determined in step C105 that it is not at the time of the variation effect execution of the point addition target (step C105; N), the process proceeds to step C107.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C105 that the fluctuation effect target for point addition is being executed (step C105; Y), it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and the points corresponding to the effect are the number of points. The addition is performed (step C106).

Next, it is determined whether a button operation condition to be added with points is satisfied (step C107).
If it is determined in step C107 that the button operation condition to be subjected to point addition is not satisfied (step C107; N), the process proceeds to step C109.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C107 that the button operation condition for point addition is satisfied (step C107; Y), that is, when the button operation for point addition is continued, the point addition condition is satisfied. It determines and adds the point corresponding to operation to the number of points (step C108).

Next, it is determined whether the number of points earned has become a bonus target value (step C109).
If it is determined in step C109 that the number of earned points is not the bonus target value (step C109; N), the process proceeds to step C111.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C109 that the number of earned points has become the bonus target value (step C109; Y), the corresponding bonus points are added to the number of points (step C110).

Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop state (waiting customer status) of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game has continued for 10 seconds (step C111).
When it is determined in step C111 that the variation stop state of the decorative special figure variation display game is not continued for 10 seconds (step C111; N), the effect point control process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C111 that the variation stop state of the decorative special feature variation display game continues for 10 seconds (step C111; Y), that is, if the second time point is reached, the number of points earned is cleared (Step C112), the effect point control process ends.

Stage change control processing
Next, the details of the stage change control process (step C12) in the above-described main process will be described. When the stage change lottery is won by the above-mentioned "stage change control", the stage change (switching of the presentation stage) is performed "after the end of the chorus portion" of the BGM. In this stage change control process, Make settings for stage change. Here, stage change control processing in the case of performing stage change in the pattern shown in FIG. 79 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the stage change control process, it is first determined whether the stage change flag is set (step C201).
If it is determined in step C201 that the stage change flag is set (step C201; Y), the process proceeds to step C207.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C201 that the stage change flag is not set (step C201; N), it is determined whether or not the variation start of the decorative feature variation display game on the display device 41 (step C202) .

If it is determined in step C202 that it is not at the start of variation of the decoration special figure variation display game (step C202; N), the stage change control process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C202 that the variation start time of the decoration special figure variation display game is determined (step C202; Y), the current stage information, number of acquired points, effect mode, symbol type, and variation information A corresponding stage change distribution table is set (step C203). The symbol type is information on a stop symbol that has started to change at present, and there are, for example, an off symbol, 16R positive variation big hit symbol, 16R normal big hit symbol, 2R positive variation big hit symbol, small hit symbols and the like. Moreover, fluctuation information is information including the type of reach and the like.
Here, in the setting of the stage change distribution table, the present number of acquired points is taken into consideration, but for example, it is possible to change the distribution ratio to the special stage according to the number of points. Become.

  Next, a stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed using the set stage change distribution table (step C204), and whether or not a stage change (normal stage change or special stage change) is won Is determined (step C205). For example, if the effect currently being executed is an effect that can not be performed overlapping with a stage change (stage change effect), is it possible to set a stage change distribution table in which the stage change is not won in step C203? Or, it copes by not performing the stage change lottery in step C204.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the stage change lottery is not performed when the effect stage during the stay is the special stage, and the stage change lottery is performed only when the current stage is the normal stage. . Therefore, when it is determined that the effect stage during stay is the special stage based on the current stage information, the stage change lottery is not performed in step C204.

If it is determined in step C205 that the stage change has not been won (step C205; N), the stage change control process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C250 that the stage change is won (step C205; Y), the stage change flag is set (step C206). In step C206, together with the stage change flag, transition destination stage information and the like capable of determining the transition destination stage are also set. When the normal stage change lottery is won, the effect stage of the transition destination is the next normal stage, and when the special stage change lottery is won, the effect stage of the transition destination is the special stage.

Next, the progress of the BGM is checked (step C207), and it is determined whether it is a stage changeable timing (step C208). In the present embodiment, since stage change is performed "after the end of the rust portion", in step C207, it is checked whether the rust end timer set in step C212 has timed up, and the time is up. For example, it is determined in step C208 that it is the stage changeable timing.
In the present embodiment, the stage change is performed “after the end of the hook portion”. However, for example, the stage change may be performed “at the end of the outro portion”. In this case, if the BGM end timer set in step C213 has timed out, it is determined that it is the stage change possible timing.

  Also, for example, the stage change enable timing may be different depending on the BGM. That is, for example, as BGM, BGM performing stage change "after completion of chorus part", BGM performing stage change "when end of outro part", and BGM capable of performing stage change unconditionally May be prepared. In this case, if the BGM being output is BGM performing a stage change "after the end of the chorus portion", it is determined that the stage change possible timing is reached when the rust end timer is up, and the BGM being output is If the BGM performs stage change at the end of the outro part, it is determined that the stage change is possible when the BGM end timer times out, and the BGM being output unconditionally changes the stage. If it is a BGM that can be performed, it is determined that it is the stage change possible timing regardless of whether the rust end timer or the BGM end timer is up.

If it is determined in step C208 that the stage change enable timing is not reached (step C208; N), the stage change control process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C208 that it is the stage change possible timing (step C208; Y), the stage change flag is cleared (step C209).

Next, display setting of the stage to be changed is performed (step C210), and reproduction setting of the stage BGM to be changed is performed (step C211). The stage to be changed (the transition destination stage) can be identified based on the transition destination stage information. If the display setting of the stage to be changed and the reproduction setting of the stage BGM to be changed are performed, the transfer destination stage information and the like may be cleared.
Next, the chorus end timer corresponding to the stage BGM to be changed is set (step C212), the BGM end timer corresponding to the stage BGM to be changed is set (step C213), and the stage change control process is ended. The rust end timer and the BGM end timer are updated at a predetermined timing. It is also possible to set timers other than the rust end timer and the BGM end timer.

In the case of the present embodiment, during the stay of one normal stage, the same BGM can be repeatedly output with the number of loops (see FIG. 77A) as the upper limit, and therefore, along with setting of the timer in step C212 and step 213. The loop number counter is set.
For example, when transitioning to an effect stage in which the number of BGM loops is three, in step C212, the rust end timer is set (the time from the start of the intro portion to the end of the rust portion is set in the rust end timer) In C213, the BGM end timer is set (the time from the start of the intro portion to the end of the outro portion is set in the BGM end timer), and "1" is set in the loop number counter. Then, every time the BGM end timer counts up, the chorus end timer and the BGM end timer are set, the loop number counter is updated by +1, and this is repeated until the value of the loop number counter becomes “3”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the stage change lottery is not won by the time when the automatic switching condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift to the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition is satisfied. . Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the stage change is not won (Step C205; N), it is determined whether the automatic switching condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the automatic switching condition is satisfied, Step C210. It is assumed that processing of ~ C213 is performed.

[Receive command check process]
Next, details of the received command check process (step C14) in the above-described main process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command receptions ( Step C301) It is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C302). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C302; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the command reception number is not 0 (step C302; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the command reception number (step C303).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C304), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C305). It is determined (step C306). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C306 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C306; N), the processing returns to step C304. If it is determined that the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C306; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C307), and the received command analysis process (step C308) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C309), and it is determined whether analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C310). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C310; N), the process returns to the process of step C307. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C310; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step C308) in the received command check process described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C321), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range. (Step C322, step C323). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C322; Y, step C323; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C324).

  If it is determined in step C322 or C323 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C322; N, step C323; N), or if it is determined in step C324 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C324; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C324 that ACT with respect to MODE is a correct combination (step C324; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of variation system commands (step C325). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C325; Y), variation system command processing (step C326) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C325 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (step C325; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C327). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, when it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C327; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C328) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C327 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot command (step C327; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C329). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C329; Y), symbol system command processing (step C330) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C329 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C329; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C331). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of single-shot commands (step C331; Y), single-shot command processing (step C332) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C331 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C331; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C333). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C333; Y), pre-reading symbol system command processing (step C334) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C333 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C333; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C335). If it is determined that MODE is in the range of the prefetch change command (Y in step C335), the read variation command process (step C336) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C335 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C335; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, the details of the one-shot system command processing (step C332) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE specifies a model (step C401).
If it is determined in step C401 that MODE is to designate a model (step C401; Y), model setting processing (step C402) for setting the model is performed, and the one-shot system command processing ends .
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C401 that MODE does not designate a model (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE instructs to initialize RAM (step C403).

When it is determined in step C403 that MODE instructs to initialize the RAM (step C403; Y), the RAM initial processing is executed to execute processing corresponding to power-on with RAM initialization in the game control apparatus 100. In step C404, the one-shot command processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C403 that MODE is not a command to initialize the RAM (step C403; N), it is determined whether MODE is a command to restore power failure (step C405).
If it is determined in step C405 that MODE is to instruct power failure recovery (step C405; Y), power failure recovery setting processing (step C406) for executing processing related to power failure recovery is performed, and single-shot system command processing is performed. Finish.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C405 that MODE is not for instructing recovery from a power failure (step C405; N), it is determined whether MODE is for instructing a customer waiting demonstration (step C407).

In step C407, when it is determined that the MODE instructs the customer waiting demo (step C407; Y), the customer waiting demo setting process (step C408) is performed to execute the process related to the start of the customer waiting state and the like. End one-shot command processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C407 that MODE does not command a customer waiting demo (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the special view 1 suspension system (step C409) .
In step C409, when MODE is determined to be within the range of the special system 1 suspension system (step C409; Y), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (step C410), and the one-shot command processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C409 that MODE is not within the range of the special view 1 suspension system (step C409; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the special view 2 suspension system (step C411) .

In step C411, when MODE is determined to be in the range of the special view 2 suspension system (step C411; Y), the special view 2 suspension information setting process (step C412) to complete the one-shot command processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C411 that MODE is not within the range of the special system 2 suspension system (step C411; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C413).
If it is determined in step C413 that MODE is in the range of the probability information system (step C413; Y), probability information setting processing (step C414) for executing processing such as setting of rendering corresponding to the probability state is performed. To complete single-shot command processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C413 that MODE is not within the range of the probability information system (step C413; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of error / illegal system (step C415).

When it is determined in step C415 that MODE is in the range of error / incorrect system (step C415; Y), error / incorrect setting processing (step C416) for executing processing such as error notification is performed to perform single-shot operation. End system command processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C415 that MODE is not within the range of error / illegal system (step C415; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is for instructing rendering mode switching (step C417).
If it is determined in step C417 that MODE is to instruct rendering mode switching (step C417; Y), rendering mode switching setting processing (step C418) is executed to execute processing such as rendering mode switching. End one-shot command processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C417 that MODE is not for instructing rendering mode switching (step C417; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is instructing symbol stopping (step C419).

When it is determined in step C419 that MODE is not for commanding symbol stop (step C419; N), the one-shot system command processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C419 that MODE is to instruct symbol stop (step C419; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol stop command (step C420).
When it is determined in step C420 that the command is not a normal symbol stop command (step C420; N), the one-shot system command is ended. The symbol stop command is divided into special figure 1 and special figure 2.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C420 that the command is a normal symbol stop command (step C420; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special view is performed (step C421), and if all symbols have stopped, the gaming state flag The normal state is set (step C422), and the one-shot command processing ends. The game state flag includes, in addition to the normal state, a fluctuating flag, a big hit flag and a small hit flag.

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
Next, the details of the pre-reading symbol system command processing (step C334) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the pre-reading symbol system command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is the special view 1 hold (step C501). That is, it is determined whether the latest prefetch symbol command received this time relates to the first starting memory.
If the latest hold information is the special view 1 hold (step C501; Y), that is, it relates to the first starting memory, the latest prefetched symbol command received this time corresponds to the special view 1 hold number [1] Save in the prefetch symbol command area (step C502), set a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag (step C504), and end the prefetch symbol system command processing.

On the other hand, when the latest hold information is not the special view 1 hold (step C501; N), that is, it relates to the second starting memory, the latest prefetched symbol command received this time corresponds to the special view 2 hold number. 2. Save in the prefetch symbol command area (step C503), set the prefetch change command reception waiting flag (step C504), and end the prefetch symbol system command processing.
The reason for which the prefetch change command reception waiting flag is set in step C504 is that the prefetch pattern command and the prefetch change command (prefetch change pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
Next, details of the prefetch change system command processing (step C336) in the above-described reception command analysis processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the prefetch variation command processing, it is first determined whether or not a prefetch variation command reception is awaited (step C601). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-described prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting.
If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (step C601; N), the prefetch change system command processing ends.
On the other hand, when waiting for reception of the prefetch change command (step C601; Y), the prefetch change command reception wait flag is cleared (step C602).

Thereafter, in the processing of steps C603 to C606, processing is performed to convert the prefetch fluctuation command (prediction fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the processing in the effect control device 300.
First, a process (step C603) is performed to set the look-ahead fluctuation mode conversion table corresponding to the number of pending symbols in the latest hold information (step C603), and the special view type of start storage corresponding to the previously received fluctuation command Alternatively, a MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the information of the special figure 2) and the current number of reservations of the special figure type.
Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-prediction change command MODE corresponding to MODE of the read change command is acquired (step C604).
Next, the pre-reading fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (step C605), and the in-sub pre-reading conversion command ACT corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation command ACT is acquired (step C606).

Although the information on the first half fluctuation is included in the MODE, the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change according to the number of reservations at the time of judgment. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment at the time.
Therefore, MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, in order to be able to perform processing of preview advance notice effect easily and reliably without being influenced by the number of reservations at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations.
For example, there may be no reach loss fluctuation, which may result in a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding status, or no reach out fluctuation fluctuation, such as a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding status. It converts into MODE classified into the item considered in the setting of pre-reading advance notice production so that processing of pre-reading advance notice production can be performed easily and certainly.

In addition, ACT contains information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach. The contents of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT do not change depending on the number of reservations at the time of determination.
However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects even in the same kind of reach such that the final stop symbol stops at one frame before the reach symbol and the one at the end of the first symbol stops and the hit case is set. Because the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide.
For this reason, the number of the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is reduced by converting the ACTs to the same ACT, and the processing load such as the check in the processing of the pre-reading advance notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether both of MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C607).
If MODE and ACT after conversion are not both 0 (step C607; N), the read command value is an abnormal command value, so the prefetch change system command processing is ended.
On the other hand, when MODE and ACT after conversion are both other than 0 (step C607; Y), the post-conversion command is the latest hold information, the prefetch change command area corresponding to the number of reservations (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or The prefetch command consistency check process (step C609) is performed to save (step C408) in the prefetch change command area in FIG. 2 and determine whether the combination (command combination) of MODE and ACT is normal.

If the command combination is not normal (step C610; N) as a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C609), the prefetch variation system command process is ended.
On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C610; Y), the latest hold information for prefetching (information about the latest hold count including the classification of special figure 1 or special figure 2) is loaded (step C611) 2.) Perform a pre-reading lottery process (step C612) for drawing the execution of pre-reading advance notice effect, and determine whether the pre-reading advance notice effect is to be generated (step C613).

Then, if the prefetch advance notice effect is not generated (step C613; N), the prefetch variation system command processing is ended.
On the other hand, in the case of generating a preview advance notice effect (step C613; Y), when the prefetch effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C612) is a prefetch effect targeted for point addition, it corresponds to the selected prefetch effect selected. The point information to be set is set (step C614). The point based on the point information set (stored) in step C614 is a point corresponding to the pre-read effect for the point addition target at a predetermined point addition timing (that is, in step C104 of the effect point control process (FIG. 98)) , Is added to the number of points.

  Next, it is determined whether the generated prefetch notice effect (that is, the prefetch notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C612)) is an effect to be started immediately (step C615). The effect to be started immediately is, for example, a previewing notice effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special drawing start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the current time. In addition, the effect of not starting immediately is a previewing notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect or variation that causes a specific effect or reach condition to be generated continuously over a plurality of special figure variation display games. These effects include an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during display, and a previewing notice effect of changing the display mode of the decorative special drawing start storage display at a timing later than the current time. In addition, as a timing which starts execution of such an effect which does not start immediately, if the special figure fluctuation display game is under execution, the special figure fluctuation display game is ended, execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started Timing etc. correspond.

If it is not an effect to start immediately (step C615; N), the prefetch change system command processing is ended. In this case, the advance notice is set, for example, at the start of the special view change display game in which the advance notice advance effect is executed.
On the other hand, if it is the effect to start immediately (step C615; Y), the display corresponding to the selected prefetch advance notice effect is set (step C616), and the prefetch change system command processing is ended.

  The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to the player with a predetermined reliability, performing the decoration special view start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal Effects such as effect display. The pre-reading system commands (pre-reading variation system commands and pre-reading symbol system commands) are commands to notify in advance of variation patterns and stop symbols corresponding to starting storages targeted for pre-reading effects. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[Design system command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol system command processing (step C330) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the symbol system command processing, first, a special figure type (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C 701), and it corresponds to the combination of MODE and ACT. The symbol type is set and saved (step C702), and the symbol system command processing ends.

  The symbol types are categories of symbols such as off symbols, 16R positive variation big hit symbols, 16R normal big hit symbols, 2R positive variation big hit symbols, small hit symbols etc, and are associated with data of ACT. Since the symbol ratio changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the probability change ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to the data of MODE from plural symbol type setting tables Is selected and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable system command processing]
Next, the details of the variable system command processing (step C326) in the above-described reception command analysis processing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in the variable system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special view type is undetermined (step C801). The special drawing type is information indicating whether the special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, and is information set in step C701 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

  If the special drawing type is undetermined (step C801; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet decided (step C801; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C802), and the variation command and the symbol type It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C803).

  If the variation command and the symbol type do not match (step C 803; Y), the variation system command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C803; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C804). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, an off symbol, a 16R positive variation big hit symbol, a 16R normal big hit symbol, a 2R positive variation big hit symbol, a small hit symbol and the like. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is performed as if the symbol command of the 16R probability variation big hit symbol was received although the variation command (variation pattern command) of loss was received. It means that it is the combination (combination of the change command and the symbol type) which contradicts with.

  In the process of determining the change pattern type from the change command (step C804), the change pattern type which is a rough classification of the change display effect of the special view is determined according to the received command. And the fluctuation production setting processing which sets the information in order to produce the production which responds to the fluctuation command is done (step C805).

  Next, the special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) (step C806). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is fluctuating (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being a fanfare medium grade). Further, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, the pre-reading effect frequency is updated by 1 (processing to reduce the pre-reading effect frequency by 1) (step C807), and the variation system command processing is ended.

[Change production setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation effect setting process (step C805) in the above-described fluctuation system command process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 107, in the variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is a no reach variation (step C811). If the change pattern type is no reach change (step C811; Y), the first-half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the current number of acquired points, model code, special view type, and effect mode is set (step C812) ). In addition, since it is a reach no change, symbol classification is always a lost pattern, and it is not necessary to refer to symbol classification here especially. Further, the effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time saving mode, a latency mode and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special view variable display game on the display device 41 are made different.

  Next, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of holdings of MODE, special view type is acquired with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C813). Thereby, in the case of no reach fluctuation, it becomes possible to change the lottery contents (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) of the notice effect appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the first half of the previous day sorting group table is used to draw a lottery for the first half appearing in the first half (step C816).

  On the other hand, if the change pattern type is not reach no change (step C811; N), set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the current number of acquired points, model code, special view type, effect mode, and symbol type Step C814. Then, referring to the first half advance distribution group address table, the address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to MODE, fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C815), and the first half change is in progress using the first half advance distribution group table The lottery for the advance notice to appear is made (step C816).

  Next, in step C817 to step C819, a notice effect of the second half fluctuation is drawn. In addition, with the second half change of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game fluctuation indication with the so-called reach action (for example, the special result feature (combination of the special design) where the display territory excluding the specific territory becomes large hitting among the display territory of the special figure) Is stopped, and it is a variable display of the state which is fluctuating display only in a specific field. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points currently acquired, the model code, the special view type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C817). The second half prior distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half previous distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT is acquired by referring to the second half of day prior sorting distribution group address table (step C 818), and the second half is fluctuating (reaching) using the second half day of sorting distribution group table A lottery for appearing notices is made (step C819).

Next, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C820). Since the fluctuation time and the main reach contents are known from the fluctuation command (MODE, ACT), the content (rendering mode) of the fluctuation effect is determined based on it.
Next, the contents of the effect corresponding to the result of the preliminary lottery carried out in step C819 are determined (step C821), and stop symbol setting processing is performed (step C822).
Next, based on the contents of the change production determined in step C820, display settings for the change production are performed (step C823), and based on the contents of the effect determined in step C821, the display settings for the advance production are performed (step C824) .
Next, display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special drawing type is performed (step C825). As a result, an animation (moving image) is set in which the decoration special drawing start storage display corresponding to the decoration special drawing variation display game to be executed this time is reduced.

Next, a voice number indicating the type of BGM output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and a decoration number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C826).
Next, the display setting of the decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view type is performed (step C827), and the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special view type is performed (step C828). finish. In step C828, when the fourth symbol is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, the display setting on the display device 41 is set, and when the fourth symbol is displayed by the LED, the LED is displayed using the LED. Set the display of.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the stop symbol setting process (step C822) in the above-mentioned fluctuation effect setting process will be described. When changing the display mode of even symbols from the non-probability display mode to the probability display mode by the above-mentioned "probability / non-probability symbol switching control", the change target symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, or the number of special view starting memory numbers When “0” is “0” (that is, when returning the display mode of the even symbol), the display mode is forced to stop display “0” which is the even symbol whose display mode changes to the probability display mode. However, in this stop symbol setting process, setting is made to forcibly stop the desired symbol.

As shown in FIG. 108, in the stop symbol setting process, first, the stop symbol setting table corresponding to the number of points currently acquired, the model code, the special view type, the effect mode, the symbol type, the change effect content, and the advance effect content It sets (step C831).
Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol type is an off symbol (step C832). If the symbol type is not an off symbol (step C832; N), the process proceeds to step C837.

On the other hand, if the symbol type is the disappointing symbol (step C832; Y), it is determined whether or not the decorative special drawing 1 holding number and the decorative special drawing 2 holding number are both 0 (step C833).
If neither of the decorative special drawing 1 holding number and the decorative special drawing 2 holding number is 0 (step C833; N), the processing proceeds to step C835.
On the other hand, when both of the decorative special drawing 1 holding number and the decorative special drawing 2 holding number are 0 (step C833; Y), that is, the special drawing start memory number is "0" and the next special drawing fluctuation display game is If the special view start memory to be generated is not stored, it is changed to a stop symbol setting table for symbol display mode return (in the case of this embodiment, for symbol color return) (step C834). As a result, the stop symbol setting table set in step C 831 is changed to a table of symbol groups that are in the same system as the table and always includes a desired symbol. In the case of the present embodiment, the desired symbol is an even symbol whose display mode first changes to a probability variation display mode.

Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired point number is to reach the display mode change target value (color change target value in the case of the present embodiment) (step C 835).
If it is determined that the number of acquired points is not scheduled to reach the color change target value (step C 835; N), the process proceeds to step C 837.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of acquired points is to reach the color change target value (step C 835; Y), that is, the number of acquired points is a prescribed value (in the case of this embodiment, “100”, “300”, or If it is planned to reach "1000" (see FIG. 66 (b)), change to a stop symbol setting table for symbol display mode change (in the case of this embodiment, for symbol color change) (step C836) . As a result, the stop symbol setting table set in step C 831 is changed to a table of symbol groups that are in the same system as the table and always includes a desired symbol. In the case of the present embodiment, the desired symbol is “0” when the acquired point number is to reach “100” of the color change target values, and the acquired point number is among the color change target values. When it is planned to reach “300” of “6”, it is “6”, and is “2” when the acquired point number is scheduled to reach “1000” of the color change target values.

Next, a symbol determination random number is extracted (step C837), and a stop symbol is acquired based on the stop symbol setting table and the extracted symbol determination random number (step C838).
Next, the acquired stop symbol is saved in the stop symbol area corresponding to the special drawing type (decorative drawing 1 or decorative special view 2) (step C839), and the stop symbol setting process is ended.
In the present embodiment, all symbol combinations (combination of left, middle and right symbols) are defined on the stop symbol setting table, and one of the symbol combinations is used as the stop symbol based on the table and the random number for symbol determination. For example, the left symbol (the symbol stopped and displayed in the left variation display area), the middle symbol (the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle variation display region), the right symbol (stopped in the right variation display region) The symbols to be displayed may be acquired by random numbers so as to be a desired combination.

[Big hit system command processing]
Next, details of the jackpot-based command processing (step C328) in the above-described reception command analysis processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the big hit system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C901).
If it is determined that MODE is a fanfare (step C901; Y), a fanfare effect setting process is performed to set effects in the fanfare (step C902), and the P machine state is set as fanfare (step C903). End command processing.
If it is determined that MODE is not a fanfare (step C901; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C904).

When it is determined that MODE is a round (Step C904; Y), a round effect setting process for setting effects in a round is performed (Step C905), and the P machine state is in a round (Step C906). End command processing.
When it is determined that MODE is not a round (Step C904; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (Step C907).

If it is determined that MODE is an interval (step C 907; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C 908), and the P machine state is in the interval (step C 909). End command processing.
If it is determined that MODE is not an interval (step C 907; N), it is determined whether MODE is an ending (step C 910).

If it is determined that MODE is ending (Step C 910; Y), an ending effect setting process is performed to set an effect during ending (Step C 911), and the P machine state is set to being ending (Step C 912). End command processing.
If it is determined that MODE is not ending (step C 917; N), the big hit system command processing ends.

[Fanfare production setting process]
Next, the details of the fanfare effect setting process (step C902) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process will be described. In this fanfare effect setting process, setting is carried out to execute the above-mentioned "probable / small hitting effect".

As shown in FIG. 110, in the fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether ACT is a big hit fanfare (16R big hit fanfare) (step C921).
When it is determined that ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C921; Y), the number of big hits is updated by +1 (step C922). This big hit number is, when the big hit continuous channel breaks off (special time (ST) state where only a specific number of revolutions is set to the high probability state, the end of fluctuation at the end of the last state, the end of the last fluctuation of the time saving state, etc. If there is a normal big hit that does not occur, it may be cleared at the end of the ending.

Next, the display content of the big hit fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the number of big hits (step C923), and the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined display content is performed (step C924), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. Do.
In addition to the probability state and the number of big hits, it is also possible to determine the display content of the big hit fanfare effect in consideration of the determination result of whether or not it is a hit from a battle effect (continuous effect) as an effect during fluctuation. is there. When battle rendition (continuous rendition) is performed in the current fluctuation rendition (during a fluctuation rendition performed immediately before (most recent)), it is determined to be a hit from the continuous rendition. By considering the determination result of whether or not it is a hit from the battle effect (continuous effect), it becomes possible to perform the jackpot effect related to the battle effect.

If ACT determines that it is not a big hit fanfare (step C921; N), it determines whether ACT is a sudden fanfare (2R positive variation big hit fanfare) (step C925).
If the ACT is determined to be a sudden fanfare (step C925; Y), it is determined whether it is a hit from a battle effect (continuous effect) as an effect during fluctuation (step C926). Even when ACT is a sudden fanfare, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If it is determined that it is not a hit from the continuous performance (step C 926; N), that is, if no battle performance (continuous performance) is performed in the current floating performance (the floating performance performed immediately before (most recent)) After determining the probability exclusive rendering corresponding to the probability state, display setting of the fanfare rendering corresponding to the determined probability exclusive rendering is performed (step C 927), and the fanfare rendering setting process is ended.
In the round effect setting process (step C 905), the interval effect setting process (step C 908), and the ending effect setting process (step C 911), the round effect display setting and interval corresponding to the probability exclusive effect determined in step C 927, respectively. The display setting of the effect and the display setting of the ending effect are performed.

In addition, when it is determined that it is a hit from the continuous production (step C926; Y), that is, when the battle production (continuous production) is performed in the current fluctuation production (the fluctuation production performed immediately before (immediately)). The lottery is determined by random determination (for example, a battle effect in which a victory effect appears) to be executed from among the surprise effect patterns related to the current fluctuation effect (step C 928), and the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined sudden effect Are set (step C929), and the fanfare effect setting process ends.
In the round effect setting process (step C 905), the interval effect setting process (step C 908), and the ending effect setting process (step C 911), the display setting for the round effect corresponding to the probability effect determined in step C 928, the interval effect The display setting of and the display setting of the ending effect are performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform a production related to the current production during fluctuation as a sudden production (for example, a battle production in which a winning production appears).

If the ACT determines that the fanfare is not a sudden fanfare (step C 925; N), it determines whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C 930).
If it is determined that the ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C930; N), the fanfare effect setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined that ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C930; Y), it is determined whether it is a hit from a battle effect (continuous effect) as an effect during fluctuation (step C931).

If it is determined that it is not a hit from the continuous effect (Step C 931; N), the small hit dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state is determined, and the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined small hit dedicated effect is performed ( Step C932) The fanfare effect setting process ends.
In the round effect setting process (step C 905), the interval effect setting process (step C 908), and the ending effect setting process (step C 911), the round effect display setting corresponding to the small hit exclusive effect determined in step C 932, respectively. Display setting of interval effect and display setting of ending effect are performed.

In addition, when it is determined that it is a hit from the continuous performance (step C 931; Y), a small hitting effect (for example, a defeat effect appears from among the small hitting effect patterns related to the current fluctuating effect) The battle effect is determined by lottery (step C933), and the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined small hit effect is performed (step C934), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended.
In the round effect setting process (step C 905), the interval effect setting process (step C 908), and the ending effect setting process (step C 911), the round effect display setting and interval corresponding to the small hit effect determined in step C 933, respectively. The display setting of the effect and the display setting of the ending effect are performed. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a production related to the current production during fluctuation as a small hit production (for example, a battle production in which a defeat production appears).

  When the result is sudden, the probability state of the big hit changes from the low probability state to the high probability state, so the sudden effect (for example, the battle effect in which the victory effect appears) is an effect that suggests the occurrence of the high probability state . On the other hand, if the result is a small hit, the big hit probability state does not change from the low probability state to the high probability state, but it may be a small hit during the high probability state. The appearing battle effect does not become an effect that suggests a low probability state. However, when the continuous rendering is performed only in the low probability state, the small hitting effect may be an effect that suggests the low probability state.

<Modification>
The update of the high probability fluctuation number may be performed not at the start of the small hit operation but at the end of the small hit operation.
Here, the high probability fluctuation number is the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in the special time (ST number).
Specifically, instead of the special chart display process shown in FIG. 39, the special chart display process shown in FIG. 111 is performed, and the small hit end process shown in FIG. In place of the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3 shown in FIG. 61, the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3 shown in FIG. 113 may be performed.

[Process while displaying special map]
In the special figure display process of this modification, as shown in FIG. 111, the high probability change number update process (step A 726) and the special figure game mode flag are loaded, and the loaded flag is saved as the special figure game mode flag. The process of saving in the area (step A733) is not performed.

[Small hit end processing]
In the small hitting end process of this modification, as shown in FIG. 112, the process of updating the high probability variation count shown in FIG. 40 is replaced with the process of loading the flag from the special view game mode flag save area (step A1601). A process of performing step A1601a) and determining whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602) and determining whether the special figure high probability is (high probability state) A step (step A1602a) is performed to load a flag from the special view game mode flag save area (step A1619) and a process to determine whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special view time short (during the short time state) (step A1620) To execute the process (step A1620a) to determine whether or not the special drawing time is in the middle (in the time reduction state) instead of). It is configured.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
In the special view ordinary process transition setting process 3 of this modification, as shown in FIG. 113, the process (step A1637) of clearing the information of the special view game mode flag save area is not performed.

In the case of the present modification, the target special figure variation display game results in a small hit, and when the special figure variation display game concerned ends the special time, the special figure targeted concerned If the big hit probability state in the variable display game is the high probability state, the big hit probability state is switched to the low probability state at the end of the small hit operation (that is, at time t6 (see FIG. 95C)).
As in the present modification, updating of the high probability fluctuation number is performed at the end of the small hitting operation, thereby processing of updating the ST number when starting the small hitting operation, processing of saving the special view game mode flag, etc. The processing load can be reduced because there is no need to perform processing for changing the probability state.
In addition, the high probability state continues until the small hit operation is finished, which is more advantageous for the player.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first start winning combination for giving a start condition of the first special view fluctuation display game, instead of the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening) 36 below the center case 40. There is provided a winning device 90 provided with a second start winning opening 97 for giving a start condition of the mouth 36 and the second special view variable display game, and the special rendering zone is not a special view 2 priority process but a winning order process. It differs from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment in that control can be performed. Therefore, in the following, parts having the same configuration as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described.

[Winning device]
FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the present embodiment.
FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (c) are front views of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment, showing a state in which the front cover member 91 is removed.
FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment as viewed from the front side.
FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment as viewed from the rear side.
FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment as viewed from the front side.
FIG. 119 (a) is a front view of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment, FIG. 119 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 119 (a), and FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of (a).
FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment as viewed from the front side.
FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view showing a winning device 90 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view showing a modification of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 114, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a first start winning opening 36 (the special drawing variation display game (special drawing 1 variation display game) start condition provided below the center case 40 (see FIG. 114). A winning device 90 having a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) giving starting conditions of a starting winning opening, a starting winning area) and a second special view variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) It is provided.
As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the winning device 90 is a sorting member 92 that alternately distributes the gaming balls having flowed into the upper inlet 90a into the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. Is equipped. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a, and the gaming ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is the start opening 2 switch for the second start winning opening 97 (not shown) Detected by That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment detects, as the starting opening 2 switch, the starting opening 2 switch 37a for detecting the gaming ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the gaming ball winning the second starting winning opening 97 And a start port 2 switch.

As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the winning device 90 is provided with a distributing member 92 at a position immediately below the inflow port 90a in the inside thereof. Further, a first start winning combination port 36 is disposed at the lower left of the distributing member 92, and a second starting winning opening 97 is disposed at the lower right of the distributing member 92.
The distributing member 92 is rotatable about an axial pin 92a along the front-rear direction, and an upper arm 92b extending upward from a position where the axial pin 92a is disposed and a left arm 92c extending leftward And a right arm 92d extending rightward. Of the three arms, a left holding portion 92e for temporarily holding a game ball is formed by the upper arm 92b and the left arm 92c on the left of the upper arm 92b, and on the right of the upper arm 92b The upper arm 92b and the right arm 92d form a right holding portion 92f that temporarily holds the gaming ball.
In a state where the upper arm 92b is always facing upward, the distributing member 92 can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a as shown in FIG. As shown in c), the right holding portion 92f can be pivoted between a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a.

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the left holding portion 92e is in a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a, the right holding portion 92f faces the second start winning opening 97 and the gaming ball is It will flow down.
Further, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), when the right holding portion 92f is in a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a, the left holding portion 92e faces the first start winning opening 36 It will be in the state which made the ball flow down.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 115 (a) and 116, a distributing member side magnet 96a is attached to the rear of the upper arm 92b of the distributing member 92. Further, of the base member 93 to which the distributing member 92 is attached from the front, the base member side magnet 96b is attached at a position facing the distributing member side magnet 96a when the upper arm 92b is vertical. There is. The distributing member-side magnet 96a and the base member-side magnet 96b are attached such that the opposing poles are the same pole, and the upper arm 92b of the distributing member 92 is vertical due to the repulsive force of the magnets 96a and 96b. It is urged to turn to either left or right without staying in the state of becoming. As a result, in a state in which the rotation of the distributing member 92 is stopped, either the left holding portion 92e or the right holding portion 92f can receive the gaming ball which has flowed into the inflow port 90a.

  As shown in FIGS. 115 (b) and (c), the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a is ready to be received toward the inflow port 90a of the left holding portion 92e and the right holding portion 92f. It is held by one holder. When the game ball is held by one of the holding portions, the weight of the game ball causes the distributing member 92 to rotate in the direction of the one holding portion, and the held gaming ball is rotated by the distributing member 92. It flows down toward the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97 in the direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the game ball which has flowed in the left holding portion 92e is received, the distributing member 92 is turned to the left by the weight of the game ball and the game ball is moved to the first start winning opening 36. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), the right holding portion 92f stops in a state where it can receive the next gaming ball. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), when the game ball which has flowed in the right holding portion 92f is received, the distributing member 92 is rotated to the right by the weight of the game ball and the game ball is moved to the second start winning opening 97. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), the left holding portion 92e stops in a state where it can receive the next gaming ball.

  There is a high possibility that the game balls flowed down from the holding portions 92e and 92f may flow into the first start winning hole 36 or the second start winning hole 97, but they may not flow in, and if they do not flow out of the winning device 90 leak. In particular, when the momentum when flowing into the holding portions 92e and 92f is strong, there is a high possibility that the fluid does not flow into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97. In addition, you may be comprised so that it may be prize-winning by any starting prize-winning opening.

  Further, when the distributing member 92 rotates, the other holding portion which is not the holding portion holding the gaming ball is in a state of being able to be received toward the inflow port 90a. Then, the game ball accepted next time is guided to the winning opening on the other holding unit side. As a result, the game balls sequentially flowing into the inflow port 90a are alternately distributed to the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 97.

  As shown in FIGS. 116 to 118, the winning device 90 mainly includes the front cover member 91, the distributing member 92, the base member 93, the rear cover member 94, the LED substrate 95, and the magnets 96a and 96b. And is configured.

The base member 93 has a mirror surface 93a (hatched portion in FIG. 116) whose surface is mirror-like, and a flow channel 93b which constitutes a flow path of the gaming ball (a flow-down path from the inflow port 90a to the start winning opening 36, 97). (The portion other than the hatched portion in FIG. 116).
The mirror surface portion 93a is covered with a mirror surface metal film formed by plating or the like, and at least the front surface is mirror surface. Further, the flow path portion 93 b is transparent or semi-transparent so that the rear can be seen.

  The front cover member 91 includes a decorative plate portion 91a constituting a front surface, an upper flow passage forming portion 91b erected on the decorative plate portion 91a, a lower left flow passage forming portion 91c, and a lower right flow passage forming portion 91d. It is mounted on the front side of the base member 93 so as to cover the front of the minute member 92 and the start winning opening 36, 97. The front cover member 91 is formed of a transparent or translucent material (for example, a translucent synthetic resin) so that the behavior of the gaming ball in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized. However, a black-painted portion in FIG. 118 is a predetermined decoration (for example, an outline decoration for forming a predetermined design like a rose pattern at the center or making the outline of the decorative plate portion 91 a stand out, etc. Or, it is applied with a paint decoration or the like for forming a predetermined design such as at the left and right end portions or the lower portion, and light can not be transmitted (or light can not be transmitted). That is, on the decorative plate portion 91a of the front cover member 91, a predetermined decoration (for example, a predetermined design such as a rose pattern at the center is formed, or the outline of the decorative plate portion 91a is made to stand out Border decorations, and fill decorations for forming predetermined designs such as those at the left and right ends and the lower part).

The rear cover member 94 is formed of a transparent or translucent material (for example, a translucent synthetic resin) so that the rear can be seen. The rear cover member 94 is attached to the rear surface side of the portion of the base member 93 to which the distributing member 92 is attached and the periphery thereof. The LED substrate 95 is disposed to face the rear cover member 94.
That is, the winning device 90 is configured to be able to light the flow path portion 93b with the light from the LED of the LED substrate 95, and that the flow path portion 93b is shining, or the start winning hole from the inflow port 90a. The game balls flowing down to 36 and 97 can be viewed through the front cover member 91.

Further, as shown in FIG. 117, a lens cut is applied to the inner surface of the upper flow passage forming portion 91b of the front cover member 91 and the rear surface of the flow passage portion 93b of the base member 93. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 116, a lens cut is also applied to the inner surface of the rear cover member 94.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 119 (b) and (c), the light from the LED substrate 95 is scattered by these lens cuts and the game balls flowing down, so that the decorative effect can be enhanced. That is, the winning device 90 of the present embodiment is a decoration by the LED substrate 95, the lens cut of the back cover member 94, the lens cut of the base member 93, the lens cut of the front cover member 91, and the game ball flowing down. Highly effective lighting effects are possible.
Further, a rose-shaped border decoration is provided at the center of the decorative plate 91a, and the diffused light is irradiated toward the player from the portion where the border decoration is not provided. It is possible to perform further light emission effects.

At least the surface on the front side of the mirror surface portion 93a of the base member 93 is a mirror surface, so that the front surface is reflected on the mirror surface portion 93a.
Since the decorative plate portion 91a of the front cover member 91 is formed larger than the flow passage portion 93b of the base member 93, as shown by the thin broken line in FIG. 118, the mirror surface portion 93a is the end of the decorative plate portion 91a. The club is reflected. In addition, the decorative plate portion 91a of the front cover member 91 has a predetermined decoration (such as an outline decoration or a fill decoration) on the front surface of the transparent or translucent light transmitting member, and as shown in FIG. The decoration (such as a border decoration or a fill decoration) of the above is applied to the end of the decorative plate 91a.
Therefore, the player is an end of the decorative plate 91a that is reflected in the mirror surface 93a directly from the front of the winning device 90 through a portion of the front cover member 91 that is not provided with a predetermined decoration. Also, since a predetermined decoration (such as a border decoration or a fill decoration) applied to the end can be visually recognized, the decoration effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, the winning device 90 of the present embodiment can perform the decoration effect by the light using the LED substrate, the lens cut, and the game ball, and the decoration effect by the predetermined decoration (such as the outline decoration or the fill decoration). It is configured to be able to. As described above, the gaming balls having flowed down from the holding portions 92e and 92f are highly likely to flow into the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97, and the player sees the behavior of the gaming balls. In order to pay attention to the winning device 90, the decoration effect as high as possible can be achieved by performing the decoration effect by the light using the LED substrate, the lens cut and the game ball and the decoration effect by the predetermined decoration (such as border decoration or fill decoration) To be able to get

Further, since the flow path forming portions 91b, 91c and 91d of the front cover member 91 are also transparent or semitransparent, they are applied to the end of the decorative plate portion 91a depending on the position and angle at which the player looks into the winning device 90. Reflection to the mirror surface portion 93a of a predetermined decoration (in the case of the present embodiment, a rose-shaped rim decoration) in addition to a predetermined decoration (such as a rim decoration or a fill decoration) Alternatively, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 120, the predetermined decoration provided at the center of the decorative plate 91a may be used instead of the predetermined decoration provided at the end of the decorative plate 91a. The reflection of the light on the mirror surface portion 93a becomes visible.
The vicinity of the winning device 90 is a place to which the player pays attention, and there is a possibility that the player looks into various positions and angles in consideration of the winning rate and nails, but according to the winning device 90 of this embodiment, Since what is reflected on the mirror surface portion 93a changes depending on the position and angle of watching, it is possible to give a surprise to the player.

The gaming balls that have not flowed into the inflow port 90a of the winning device 90 are reflected in the mirror surface 93a since they pass in front of the mirror surface 93a when flowing down. Furthermore, since the surface of the game ball is also mirror-like, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), when the game ball passes in front of the mirror surface 93a, the decorative plate 91a or the display plate is displayed on the surface of the game ball. The predetermined decoration given to the part 91a is reflected.
Although the player does not show interest in the game ball that has not flowed into the winning device 90, according to the winning device 90 of the present embodiment, since such a game ball can be used to perform a decoration effect, It can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 121 (b), the mirror surface 93a is given a decoration 93c, and a predetermined decoration (such as a border decoration or a paint decoration given on the decorative plate 91a) and a mirror surface reflected in the mirror surface 93a It is also possible to constitute so that one design (pattern) may be formed by the decoration 93c of the part 93a.
In the example shown in FIG. 121 (b), the mirror surface 93a is decorated with a downward triangle as the decoration 93c, and the end of the decorative plate 91a is painted with an upward arrow. When the paint decoration is reflected in the mirror surface portion 93a, a star-shaped design is formed by the paint decoration and the decoration 93c.
By configuring in this way, the player can be surprised because one design is formed or not formed depending on the position and angle at which the player looks into.
In addition, since the part of the decorative plate 91a that is reflected in the mirror surface 93a changes depending on the position and angle at which the player looks into the mirror surface 93a, a plurality of decorations 93c having different positions, shapes, etc. are provided on the mirror surface 93a. The position and the shape of the design formed by the predetermined decoration and the decoration 93c reflected in the mirror surface 93a may be different depending on the position and the angle at which the player looks into. In FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b), for convenience, only a part of the predetermined decoration is blackened.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the winning device 90 in which the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 formed on the gaming board 30 can flow, the winning device 90 is A base member 93 for attaching the winning device 90 to the game board 30, and a decoration member provided in front of the base member 93 with a predetermined decoration (in the case of the present embodiment, a border decoration, a fill decoration, etc.) And a front cover member 91), and the base member 93 is formed with a mirror surface portion 93a that reflects at least a part of the decoration member and allows visual recognition from the front.

  Therefore, not only the decorative member (front cover member 91) can be directly viewed from the front of the winning device 90, but also the decorative member reflected on the mirror surface portion 93a of the base member 93 can be viewed. It is possible to enhance the character and to increase the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the decoration member (the front cover member 91) is a predetermined decoration (in the case of the present embodiment, the edging decoration or the fill decoration) on the front surface of the transparent or translucent light transmitting member. And so on, and the mirror part 93a can be configured to reflect a predetermined decoration.

  With such a configuration, the predetermined decoration applied to the decorative member (the front cover member 91) can not only be directly viewed from the front of the winning device 90 but also reflected in the mirror surface portion 93a of the base member 93 The decoration of can also be seen. Furthermore, since what is reflected on the mirror surface portion 93a changes depending on the position and angle at which the player looks into the winning device 90, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 provided with the winning device 90 having a decorative property which is not available conventionally.

Here, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-111910 describes a gaming machine provided with a front decoration part that covers the front of a winning device such as a pottery. However, in such a gaming machine, increasing the size of the front decoration to increase the decorativeness of the winning device increases the space.
In addition, if the decoration given to the front decoration part is complicated to enhance the decorativeness of the winning device, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the state (behavior) of the gaming ball that has flowed into the winning device, so the player pays great attention. This makes it difficult to recognize the start winning combination, which is a condition for executing the variable display game, which causes obstacles to the progress of the game, which increases the player's dissatisfaction and reduces the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, not only can the decorative member (the front cover member 91) be viewed directly from the front of the winning device 90, but also the decorative member reflected in the mirror surface portion 93a of the base member 93 Thus, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 having the winning device 90 capable of attracting the player's interest without increasing the size, that is, the winning device 90 having a high space and space.
In addition, the LED or lens cut makes it possible to appeal to the player the flow path until the inflowing game ball starts and achieves a winning prize, and it is also possible to perform the decoration effect by the game ball that has not flowed into the winning device. , Can enhance the decoration.
Furthermore, since what is reflected on the mirror surface part 93a changes depending on the position and angle at which the player looks into the winning device 90, the game has a winning device 90 that has an unprecedented decorativeness and can improve the interest of the game. Machine 10 can be provided.

[Back component member]
FIG. 122 is a front view of the rear surface constituting member 600 of the present embodiment, in which (a) shows a state in which the left and right rendering unit 640 has been removed, and (b) shows a left and right rendering unit 640. It is.
FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the rear surface forming member 600 of the present embodiment as viewed from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 114, the center case 40 includes, for example, a rear surface forming member 600 including the display device 41 and the like, and a front surface forming member 40a mounted on the front side of the rear surface forming member 600.
As shown in FIGS. 122 (a), (b) and FIG. 123, the rear surface configuration member 600 mainly includes a display device 41 and a display unit 610 including a display control device attached to the rear surface side of the display device 41. A control base member 620 having a concave chamber in which the display unit 610 is mounted from the rear and opening in the front and allowing the display portion of the display device 41 disposed at the rear to be visible; And a frame-like upper effect unit 650 attached to the front side of the control base member 620 from the front of the left-right effect unit 640; The lower rendering unit 660 mounted on the front side of the lower portion of the unit 650, and the front side of the upper rendering unit 650 from the front of the lower rendering unit 660 It is constituted by a ball passage unit 670 to be mounted.
The board effect device (first movable effect member) 44a is provided in the upper effect unit 650, and the board effect devices (second movable effect member) 44b and 44c are provided in the left and right effect unit 640, and the board effect device (third movable effect The member 44 d is provided in the lower effect unit 660.

FIG. 124 (a) is a front view of the upper effect unit 650 of the present embodiment, showing a state in which the upper loose unit 700 is removed, and FIG. 124 (b) is an upper effect unit of the present embodiment FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of a state 650 with the upper loose unit 700 removed.
125 (a) and 125 (b) are enlarged views showing the central portion of the decorative lens member 652a included in the upper effect unit 650 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 125 (c) is the upper effect unit 650 of the present embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the decorative lens member 652a with which this is comprised from the rear surface side.
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the upper effect unit 650 and the lower effect unit 660 in the present embodiment.
FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 124 (a).

The upper effect unit 650 mainly moves vertically to the frame-shaped mounting base member 651, the lower rose decoration member 652 mounted on the front side of the lower portion of the mounting base member 651, and the upper side of the upper portion of the mounting base member 651. It comprises and comprises the upper loose unit 700 mounted possible.
As shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b), the lower rose decorative member 652 is a decorative lens member 652a, an LED substrate 652b mounted on the rear surface side of the decorative lens member 652a, and a decoration from the rear of the LED substrate 652b. And a cover member 652c mounted on the rear surface side of the lens member 652a.

A decoration (in the case of this embodiment, a decoration in a rose pattern) is applied to the front surface of the decorative lens member 652a of the lower rose decorative member 652, and the part of the decoration excluding the border portion (FIG. 125 (b) The surface of the grid pattern portion is a mirror surface, for example, covered with a mirror-like metal film formed by plating or the like.
As shown in FIG. 126, a lower effect unit 660 is disposed in front of the lower rose decoration member 652. Therefore, the rear surface configuration of the lower effect unit 660 (in the case of this embodiment, the drive mechanism (gear etc. of the board effect device (third movable effect member) 44 d)) is reflected in the mirror surface portion of the front surface of the decorative lens member 652 a (See the portion enclosed by a dashed dotted line in FIG. 125 (a)). Specifically, when the third movable effect member 44d is in the first position (see FIG. 3), an opaque member (lower effect unit between the lower rose decoration member 652 and the third movable effect member 44d) Because the base member of 660 intervenes, gears and the like do not appear on the mirror surface portion of the decorative lens member 652a, but when the third movable effect member 44d shifts from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 2) , Gears and the like project above the base member of the lower effect unit 660, and therefore, are reflected on the mirror surface portion of the decorative lens member 652a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress reflection on the mirror surface portion of the decorative lens member 652a (dangle the reflection), as shown in FIG. 125 (c), a lens cut is performed on the rear surface of the decorative lens member 652a. In addition, a groove 652a1 which is open at the front side is formed in the rim portion of the front surface of the decorative lens member 652a.
By forming the groove 652a1 in the rim portion of the decorative lens member 652a, the rim portion becomes thinner in the front-rear direction, so light from the rear (light from the LED of the LED substrate 652b) easily leaks forward through the rim portion Become. Furthermore, by forming a lens cut on the rear surface of the decorative lens member 652a, as shown in FIG. 127, light randomly diffused by the lens cut leaks through the groove 652a1 and is reflected by the mirror surface, so Reflection can be suppressed.

For example, it is also possible to attach a mirror surface seal in which a rose pattern (including an edge) is drawn on the entire front surface of the decorative lens member 652a. However, only by applying the mirror seal, light from the rear does not leak forward, so the rear face configuration of the front unit is reflected on the mirror seal, and the decorative effect is reduced.
On the other hand, according to the lower rose decoration member 652 of this embodiment, the light diffused at random leaks through the groove 652a1 and is reflected at the mirror surface portion, and the reflection causes the unit in front (in the case of this embodiment) The reflection of the rear surface configuration of the lower effect unit 660) can be suppressed, and since the light emission effect can be performed by the reflection, the decoration effect can be enhanced. That is, the lower rose decorative member 652 of the present embodiment has a decorative effect by the mirror surface portion of the decorative lens member 652a, the lens cut of the decorative lens member 652a, and the gap (groove 652a1) formed in the decorative lens member 652a. High luminous effects are possible.

FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the upper bulkhead unit 700 of this embodiment as viewed from the front side.
FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the upper bulkiness unit 700 of the present embodiment as viewed from the rear side.
FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram for explaining the open state of the upper bulkhead unit 700 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram for explaining the closed state of the upper bulkhead unit 700 of this embodiment.
FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b) are diagrams for explaining the lens cut positions in the upper bulkhead unit 700 of this embodiment.
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the open state of the upper bulkhead unit 700 in the present embodiment.
FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (d) are diagrams for explaining the state conversion of the upper bulkhead unit 700 of this embodiment.
FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (d) are diagrams for explaining the state conversion of the upper bulkhead unit 700 according to this embodiment.
Fig. 135 (a) is a view showing a case where the upper bulkhead unit 700 of the present embodiment is in an open state, and Fig. 135 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in Fig. 135 (a).
FIG. 136 is a view showing a modified example of the upper bulkhead unit 700 of this embodiment.

The upper loose unit 700 is mounted on the front side of the upper portion of the mounting base member 651 so as to be vertically movable. Specifically, the upper bulkhead unit 700 is movable between an upper position where a part or all does not overlap the display area of the display 41 and a lower position where the whole overlaps the display area of the display 41 (See FIG. 137 and FIG. 138).
As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the upper bulkhead unit 700 is mainly mounted on the movable base member 710 and the front surface side of the movable base member 710 so as to be rotatable relative to the movable base member 710 and forwardly A rotary base member 720 having an open concave chamber, a drive mechanism 730 for rotationally driving the rotary base member 720, an LED substrate 740 mounted in the concave chamber of the rotary base member 720, and the rotary base member from the front of the LED substrate 740 It comprises and the 1st movable presentation member 44a with which the front side of 720 is attached.

  The first movable effect member 44a has a non-movable effect member 750 with a decoration on the front surface, and an upper movable effect rotatably attached to the upper end of the non-movable effect member 750 with respect to the non-movable effect member 750. The lower movable effect member 770 is rotatably attached to the lower end portion of the non-movable effect member 750 with respect to the non-movable effect member 750.

The upper movable effect member 760 rotates about the rotation axis 760a (see FIG. 133) by rotating the rotation base member 720 with respect to the movable base member 710, and the state shown in FIG. 130 (a) It can be converted into a state (generally parallel to the non-movable effect member 750) and a state shown in FIG. 130 (b) (a state substantially perpendicular to the non-movable effect member 750).
In addition, the lower movable effect member 770 rotates about the rotation shaft 770a (see FIG. 133) as the rotation base member 720 rotates with respect to the movable base member 710, as shown in FIG. 130 (a). It can be converted into a state (a state substantially parallel to the non-movable effect member 750) and a state (a state substantially perpendicular to the non-movable effect member 750) shown in FIG. 130 (b).

Upper movable effect member 760 and lower movable effect member 770 are biased by biasing members 760b and 770b (see FIG. 133) such as springs so as to be substantially perpendicular to non-movable effect member 750. ing.
Hereinafter, a state in which the upper movable effect member 760 and the lower movable effect member 770 are substantially parallel to the non-movable effect member 750 shown in FIG. 130 (a) is referred to as an “open state”. A state substantially perpendicular to the movable effect member 750 is referred to as a "closed state".

As shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the non-movable effect member 750 includes the front decoration member 751 and the rear base member 752. Similarly, the upper movable effect member 760 is composed of a front decorative member 761 and a rear base member 762, and the lower movable effect member 770 is composed of a front decorative member 771 and a rear base member 772.
The front decorative members 751, 761 and 771 and the rear base members 752, 762 and 772 are formed of a transparent or translucent material (for example, a translucent synthetic resin) so that the rear can be seen. And as shown to Fig.131 (a), the irregular fine lens cut is given to the back surface of front side decoration member 751, 761, 771. Although not shown, a lattice-like lens cut is applied to the front of the rear base members 752, 762, and 772.
Further, a decoration (in the case of the present embodiment, a rose-shaped decoration) is provided on the front surface of the front side decorative members 751, 761 and 771. Specifically, the decoration of the central part of the rose is on the front of the front decorative member 751, the decoration of the upper part of the rose is on the front of the front decorative member 761, and the lower part of the rose is on the front of the front decorative member 771. A decoration is applied, and the surface of the border portion of the decoration is covered with a mirror-like metal film formed by plating or the like to become a mirror surface. Thereby, one rose is completed by converting the upper loose unit 700 from the closed state to the open state.

  As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the drive mechanism 730 is disposed on the front side of the movable base member 710, and includes a motor (drive source) 731 and a main gear 732 attached to the drive shaft of the motor 731. And one or more (three in this embodiment) driven gears 733 rotationally driven by the main gear 732, and a gear pressing member 734 for preventing the driven gears 733 from being separated from the movable base member 710, and driven A rotation gear 735 rotationally driven by the gear 733 and a rotation gear pressing member 736 for preventing the rotation gear 735 from being separated from the movable base member 710 are provided.

The rotating base member 720 is fixed to the rotating gear 735 and rotates with the rotating gear 735.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, on the rear surface side of the rotary base member 720, a stopper 721 that protrudes rearward is formed. As shown in FIG. 132, when the stopper 721 abuts on the stopper abutting portion 734a at the upper end of the gear pressing member 734, the rotation base member 720 can be prevented from rotating more than necessary.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, a position detection sensor 780 is attached to the front side of the movable base member 710, and a position detection piece 722 is attached to the rear side of the rotation base member 720. By the position detection piece 722 being detected by the position detection sensor 780, the effect control device 300 is configured to be able to recognize that the upper loose unit 700 is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 128, movable guides 723 and 723 projecting forward and extending in the width direction of the rotation base member 720 are formed at both longitudinal end portions of the rotation base member 720.
The width of the rotating base member 720 is substantially equal to the width (length in the vertical direction) of the non-moving effect member 750, and in the closed state, the longitudinal direction of the rotating base member 720 and the longitudinal direction of the non-moving effect member 750 (Horizontal direction) matches. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), in the closed state, the rotary base member 720 does not protrude in the vertical direction from the non-movable effect member 750.

When the rotary base member 720 rotates to convert from the closed state to the open state, the longitudinal direction of the rotary base member 720 is shifted from the longitudinal direction of the non-movable effect member 750, as shown in FIG. 134 (b). The rotation base member 720 protrudes from the non-moving effect member 750 in the vertical direction. When the rotary base member 720 vertically protrudes from the non-movable effect member 750, as shown in FIG. 133A, the movable guides 723 and 723 of the rotary base member 720 are connected to the upper end portion of the non-movable effect member 750. The upper movable effect member 760 is in contact with the rear base member 762 of the upper movable effect member 760 and the rear base member 772 of the lower movable effect member 770 connected to the lower end of the non-movable effect member 750. The movable effect member 770 is pushed in the direction to stand up.
When the amount of rotation of the rotation base member 720 is increased, as shown in FIGS. 134 (c) and 134 (d), the protruding height of the rotation base member 720 gradually increases, so as shown in FIGS. 133 (b) to (d). As shown, while the upper movable presentation member 760 and the lower movable presentation member 770 are kept pushed by the movable guides 723 and 723, the contact positions of the movable guides 723 and 723 with the rear base members 762 and 772 are on the proximal side. It moves from the end to the tip side. Therefore, the upper movable effect member 760 and the lower movable effect member 770 gradually stand up, and eventually become an open state. Here, the “base end side” refers to the side of the upper movable effect member 760 and the lower movable effect member 770 that is connected to the non-movable effect member 750, and the “tip end side” is the opposite thereof. It is the side.

  As described above, the first movable effect member 44a (non-movable effect member 750 (front decoration member 751, rear base member 752), upper movable effect member 760 (front decoration member 761, rear base member 762), lower movable The effect member 770 (front decorative member 771 and rear base member 772) is transparent or translucent, and the front decorative members 751, 761 and 771 and the rear base members 752, 762 and 772 have different patterns. A lens cut is applied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the upper bulkhead unit 700 can perform decoration effect by the light from the LED of the LED substrate 740.

Furthermore, since the LED substrate 740 is housed in the rotation base member 720, it rotates together with the rotation base member 720. Therefore, in the process of converting the state of the upper bulkhead unit 700 between the closed state and the open state, it is possible to perform decoration effects by different light emission modes.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (d), the inclination of the rotation base member 720 (that is, the first movable effect of the light from the LED substrate 740) in the process of the upper bulkhead unit 700 performing state conversion. The irradiation position on the member 44a gradually changes (indicated by a broken line in the drawing). Therefore, not only the open / close operation effect (effect to change from the closed state to the open state and return to the closed state) but also the decoration effect by different light emission modes can be performed by changing the state of the upper bulkhead unit 700.
In addition, since the LED substrate 740 rotates with the rotation base member 720, the upper movable effect member 760 and the lower movable effect member 770 standing up by the light from the LED substrate 740 and the upper movable effect member 760 in the upright state The lower movable effect member 770 can be illuminated. Therefore, the light emission decoration of the upper movable effect member 760 and the lower movable effect member 770 can be performed without separately providing the LED substrate for the upper movable effect member 760 and the LED substrate for the lower movable effect member 770.

According to the upper rose unit 700 of the present embodiment, lens cutting is performed on both the front decorative members 751, 761 and 771 and the rear base members 752, 762, and 772. , 761, 771 and the rear side base members 752, 762, and 772, the light from the LED substrate 740 is diffused at random, and even with the light from the LED substrate 740, the entire first movable effect member 44a is sufficient. It can be lighted (to the extent that the necessary decorative effect can be obtained). However, in the open state, the longitudinal direction both end portions (that is, the left end portion and the right end portion) of the non-movable effect member 750 can not be directly illuminated by the light from the LED substrate 740. It can not be made to shine evenly. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, in addition to the LED substrate 740, both longitudinal end portions of the non-movable effect member 750 can be made to light the entire non-movable effect member 750 substantially uniformly even in the open state. The LED substrates 741 and 742 may be disposed at the rear.
When the LED substrates 741 and 742 are configured to be able to be accommodated in the movable base member 710, it is possible to perform light emission decoration with a space saving.

Furthermore, lens cutting may be performed not only on the rear surface of the front side decorative members 751, 761 and 771, but also on the front surface. Specifically, a lens cut may be applied to the surface of the portion (the lattice pattern portion in FIG. 136) of the front decoration of the front side decorative members 751, 761 and 771 excluding the border portion. In FIG. 136, for convenience, only a part of the border portion is blacked out, and only a part of the portion excluding the border portion is a lattice pattern.
As described above, by performing lens cutting on the front surface of the front side decorative members 751, 761 and 771, the whole of the first movable effect member 44a (the non-movable effect member 750, the upper movable effect member 760, the lower movable effect member 770) Even if the LED substrate is not provided at the rear, the light is diffused at random due to the lens cut of the front decorative members 751, 761 and 771, and the entire first movable effect member 44a can be illuminated substantially uniformly. . Therefore, light emitting effects with high decorative effects can be achieved at low cost. Furthermore, since one design (in the case of the present embodiment, a rose) is completed when the first movable effect member 44a is in the open state, it is possible to perform a highly decorative effect with light emission effect.
Note that both of the installation of the LED substrates 741 and 742 and the lens cut on the front surface of the front side decorative members 751, 761 and 771 may be adopted, or either one may be adopted.

FIGS. 137 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 138 (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of effects using the upper rose unit 700 of the present embodiment.
For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the upper loose unit 700 always stands by in a closed state at an upper position where a part or all of the upper loose unit does not overlap the display area of the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 137 (b), when a predetermined game event (reach in this example) occurs, the effect control device 300 displays the upper loose unit 700 as shown in FIG. 137 (c). Move to the lower position overlapping the display area of the device 41, and when the upper bulkhead unit 700 arrives at the lower position, display the effect display on the portion of the display area of the display device 41 which is the periphery of the first movable effect member 44a. . In addition, the effect control device 300 performs, for example, a rose effect lottery whether or not the effect is performed by the upper rose unit, and when the upper rose effect lottery is won, the upper rose according to the occurrence of the predetermined game event. It is configured to perform an effect by the unit 700. In the effect by the upper rose unit 700, as shown in FIG. 137, after the upper rose unit 700 is moved to the lower position overlapping the display area of the display device 41, the first effect in which conversion to the open state is not performed; As shown in FIG. 138, there is included a second effect in which the upper loose unit 700 is moved to the lower position overlapping the display area of the display device 41 and then converted to the open state. Further, the higher the expectation of the change, the higher the probability that the second effect will be won in the upper rose effect drawing may be made higher.

When the first effect is won in the upper rose effect drawing, the effect control device 300 returns the upper rose unit 700 to the upper position as it is without performing the opening / closing operation effect or the like, as shown in FIG. 137 (d). The result of the change, which is stopped and displayed on the display device 41, is made visible.
On the other hand, when the second effect is won in the upper rose effect lottery, as shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b), the upper rose unit 700 opens and closes the operation (from the closed state to the open state and the closed state) After performing the effect of returning to), the upper bulkiness unit 700 is returned to the upper position, and the result of the variation displayed stop on the display device 41 is made visible. Further, the effect control device 300 enlarges the effect display displayed on the display device 41 when the upper bulkhead unit 700 is opened due to the opening / closing operation effect.

Further, after that, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), when a predetermined effect such as re-lottery effect occurs, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 138 (d), sets the upper loose unit 700. By moving it to the lower position, as shown in FIGS. 138 (e) and 138 (f), the opening / closing operation can be performed by the upper loose unit 700.
Thus, the light from the display device 41 is also irradiated to the first movable effect member 44 a by converting the upper bulkhead unit 700 to the open state at the lower position, and thus the LED substrate 740 (or the LED substrate 740). , 741, 742) can be compensated by the light from the display device 41.
For example, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), when a predetermined effect such as re-lottery effect occurs, an image prompting a pressing operation on effect operation unit 550 is displayed on display device 41, and the player follows the image. It is also possible to make the execution timing of the rendering operation (up and down operation and opening and closing operation) of the upper bulkhead unit 700 different depending on whether the pressing operation is performed or not. In that case, when the player performs the pressing operation in the effective period of the effect operation unit 550, the effect operation is performed at the timing when the player performs the operation, and the player presses the effective operation period of the effect operating unit 550. When the operation is not performed, the rendering operation is performed at the timing when the valid period ends.

[Normal fluctuation winning device]
FIGS. 139 (a) and (b) are front views of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 of this embodiment, and FIG. 139 (c) is a perspective view of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 of this embodiment as viewed from the front side. It is.
FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (d) are diagrams showing an example of effects using the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment.
FIG. 141, FIG. 142 (a)-(d), and FIG. 143 (a)-(d) are figures which show the modification of the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 of this embodiment.

The base member 37e of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is formed of a transparent or translucent material (for example, a translucent synthetic resin) so that the rear can be seen. Of the front surface of the base member 37e, the surface of the region (hatched region in FIG. 139 (a)) including the portion corresponding to the movable range of the movable member 37b is covered with a mirror-like metal film formed by plating or the like. And so on, it is a mirror surface.
Further, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is formed of a transparent or semi-transparent material as in the case of the decorative plate portion 91a of the above-mentioned winning device 90, and the predetermined decoration (the edging decoration or the fill decoration) Etc.).
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 139 (b) and (c), the mirror part of the base member 37e is provided with a predetermined decoration (such as a border decoration or a paint decoration) applied to the movable member 37b or a normal fluctuation winning device The game ball which flows into 37 is reflected.

In the partition 37d of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the decorative portion (hatched portion in FIG. 139 (b)) is transparent or translucent. Moreover, in the partition wall 37d, an LED substrate 37f is attached. Therefore, the decorative portion of the partition wall 37d can be illuminated by the light from the LED of the LED substrate 37f.
The effect control device 300 is configured to notify that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state by lighting the decorative portion of the partition 37d with the light from the LED substrate 37f. The manner of lighting the decorative portion of the partition wall 37d can be appropriately selected. For example, a plurality of decorative portions may be lighted simultaneously, and as shown in FIGS. 140 (a) to (d), the time until the open state is A plurality of decorative parts may be illuminated sequentially to count.

In the same manner as the winning device 90, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is also configured to allow the behavior of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be visible and to light the flow path of the gaming ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. For this purpose, it is possible to provide an LED substrate or to cut a lens.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 141, the upper surface portion (thick line portion in FIG. 141) of the partition wall 37d is made transparent or translucent, and the inner surface of the upper surface portion is subjected to lens cutting, and the game ball guided by the upper surface portion It is also possible to make it light with the light from LED board 37f in partition 37d. In addition, since the light from LED board 37f is diffused at random by the said lens cut by giving a lens cut to the inner surface of the upper surface part of the partition 37d, as shown in FIG. 141, LED of the LED board 37f is upwards Even though the light from the LED substrate 37f can illuminate the decorative portion of the partition 37d, the LED substrate 37f as shown in FIG. 139 (in addition to the LED substrate 37f disposed so that the LED faces upward) You may provide LED board 37f arrange | positioned so that LED may face down.

Also, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may not be in the one-sided opening, but may be in the two-side opening as shown in FIGS.
In the example shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (d), the movable members 37b and 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 are made of a transparent or translucent material (for example, a translucent synthetic resin) so that the rear can be seen. And the front of movable members 37b and 37b is decorated with a feather pattern. Also, on the front surface of the base member 37e of the normal variation winning apparatus 37, the same feather pattern decoration as the decoration applied to the movable member 37b is provided, and the operation range of the movable members 37b and 37b in the front surface of the base member 37e The surface of the region including the portion corresponding to is mirror-finished. The base member 37e has four decorations aligned in the left-right direction, and the decoration at the left end and the decoration at the right end of the four decorations overlap in the front-rear direction with the decoration of the movable members 37b and 37b in the closed state. It is applied to the position.

Thus, as shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), when the movable members 37b and 37b are in the closed state, the decoration at the left end and the decoration at the right end of the four decorations of the base member 37e are the movable member 37b. , 37b, making it difficult to visually recognize, so that four decorations can be viewed as a whole, but when the movable members 37b, 37b are in the open state, FIG. 142 (c), As shown in (d), all the four decorations of the base member 37e can be viewed, so that a total of six decorations can be viewed together with the decorations of the movable members 37b and 37b. it can. Also, depending on the position and angle at which the player usually looks into the variable winning device 37, the reflection of the decoration of the movable members 37b and 37b on the mirror surface of the base member 37e can also be visually recognized. Can be viewed as if the 8 decorations are given.
As described above, according to the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 shown in FIG. 142, the number of decorations of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 changes depending on the opening and closing of the movable members 37b and 37b and the position and angle of watching at that time. Can give surprises to
Furthermore, since the surface of the gaming ball is also mirror-like, when the gaming ball passes in front of the decoration of the base member 37e as shown in FIG. 142 (d), the decoration is reflected on the surface of the gaming ball, Depending on the position and angle at which the player looks into the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the decoration reflected in the game ball can also be visually recognized. Therefore, the decoration effect can be performed even by the game balls flowing into the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so the decoration effect can be further enhanced.
In the case of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 shown in FIG. 142 as well as the winning device 90, the behavior of the gaming balls in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can be visually recognized, and the game in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 An LED substrate may be provided or a lens cut may be applied to light the flow path of the ball.

Also, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 does not have the movable member 37b opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right (or left), as shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to (d), It may be provided with an opening and closing member 37g which is opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side.
In the example shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to (d), the front surface of the base member 37e included in the normal variation winning device 37 is mirror-like, and the front surface of the base member 37e is decorated with a concavo-convex shape of hexagonal pattern There is. In addition, the regulation member 37h (a member mounted on the front side of the base member 37e for regulating the size of the prize opening) included in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is transparent or translucent so that the rear can be seen. While being formed of a material (for example, a translucent synthetic resin), a predetermined decoration (in this example, a border of a hexagonal pattern) is provided on the front surface of the regulation member 37 h. Further, the opening and closing member 37g is formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the side faces 37g1 and 37g1 of the opening and closing member 37g are provided with a predetermined decoration, and the opening and closing member 37g of the regulating member 37h is The opposing surfaces 37h1 and 37h1 that face the side surfaces 37g1 and 37g1 of the opening and closing member 37g when in the open state are mirror surfaces.

According to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (d), a concavo-convex decoration is formed on the front surface of the base member 37e, and as shown in FIG. 143 (d) Since a predetermined decoration applied to the lens is reflected on the front of the base member 37e, a three-dimensional decoration can be performed.
Further, since the restricting member 37h is transparent or translucent, it is possible to visually recognize, through the restricting member 37h, a game ball which can not flow into the normal variable winning apparatus 37 and passes behind the restricting member 37h. Further, since the surface of the gaming ball is mirror-like, as shown in FIG. 143 (d), when the gaming ball passes behind the regulation member 37h, the predetermined decoration of the regulation member 37h is formed on the surface of the gaming ball Reflects. Therefore, since the decoration effect can be performed even by the game balls that have not flowed into the normal change winning device 37, the decoration effect can be further enhanced.
Further, the side surface 37g1 of the opening and closing member 37g is provided with a predetermined decoration, and the opposing surface 37h1 of the regulating member 37h is a mirror surface, so that the opening and closing member 37g is converted to the open state. The predetermined decoration is reflected on the facing surface 37h1 of the regulating member 37h. Therefore, the decoration effect can be performed by opening and closing the opening and closing member 37g, and the decoration effect can be further enhanced.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 equipped with the normal fluctuation winning device 37 shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (d), a winning device in which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 formed on the gaming board 30 can flow In the gaming machine provided with the (normal variation winning device 37), the winning device includes a base member 37e for attaching the winning device to the game board 30, and a predetermined decoration (in the case of this embodiment, a border decoration, a fill decoration, etc. And a decorative member (regulating member 37h) disposed in front of the base member 37e, and at least a part of the decorative member is reflected on the base member 37e and a mirror surface portion visible from the front Is formed.

  Therefore, not only can the decorative member (regulating member 37h) be viewed directly from the front of the winning device (normal variation winning device 37), but also the decorative member reflected on the mirror surface of the base member 37e (the front surface of the base member 37e) Therefore, it is possible to enhance the decorativeness of the winning device and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 equipped with the normal fluctuation winning device 37 shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (d), the decorative member (regulating member 37h) is formed on the front surface of the transparent or translucent translucent member. It is possible to apply decoration (in the case of the present embodiment, a border decoration, a fill decoration, etc.) and make it so that a predetermined decoration is reflected on the mirror surface (the front surface of the base member 37e).

  With such a configuration, it is possible not only to directly view the predetermined decoration applied to the decoration member (regulating member 37h) directly from the front of the winning device (normal fluctuation winning device 37), but also to the mirror surface portion (base The predetermined decoration reflected on the front surface of the member 37e can also be visually recognized. Furthermore, the game machine 10 is provided with the prize game apparatus having an ornamental property which has not been achieved in the prior art, because the one reflected on the mirror surface (the front face of the base member 37e) changes depending on the position and angle at which the player looks into the prize apparatus. Can.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
The gaming control apparatus 100 according to the second embodiment performs the special figure holding information determination process shown in FIG. 144 instead of the special figure holding information determination process shown in FIG.
In the case of the second embodiment, it is not a special figure 2 priority process but a winning order process, and no look-ahead condition is provided. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 144, a process of checking a look-ahead condition (steps A151 to A153 in FIG. 19). From the big hit determination process (step A154) to the rendering command setting process (step A169). It should be noted that the pre-reading condition may be set even if the winning order is taken.

[Special figure usual processing]
The game control device 100 according to the second embodiment performs the special view routine processing shown in FIG. 145 instead of the special view routine processing shown in FIG.
In the case of the second embodiment, the special figure 2 is not a priority order but is a winning order order, so the special figure 2 holds the special figure 2 without performing a process (step A 301 in FIG. 21) for preferentially checking the special figure 2 reserve number. It is determined whether it is "0" (step A301a).
Then, when it is determined that the number of special map reservations is "0" (step A301a; Y), that is, when both the number of special image 1 suspension and the number of special image 2 suspension are "0", the customer waiting demo Are performed from the process (step A311) for determining whether or not the process has been started, to the special process normal process shift setting process 1 (step A315).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special map reservations is not "0" (step A301a; N), that is, if at least one of the special diagrams 1 and 2 is not "0," It is determined whether the drawing is the special drawing 1 (step A306a). Thus, as described above, since the game balls that have won the winning device 90 in the normal gaming state are alternately distributed to the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 97, they are stored as the first start memory. It is checked whether the memory is the starting memory by the winning of the first start winning opening 36 or the starting memory of the winning by the second starting winning opening 97.
Then, when it is determined that the special drawing that fluctuates this time is special drawing 1 (step A306a; Y), the special drawing fluctuation start process (step A307) to the special drawing fluctuation processing transition setting process of special drawing 1 (step A307) Perform the steps up to step A310).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special drawing that fluctuates this time is not special drawing 1 (step A306; N), that is, when the special drawing that fluctuates this time is special drawing 2, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) The processing up to the processing transition setting processing (step A305) of the special drawing in the special drawing 2 is performed.

[Special map information setting process]
The game control apparatus 100 of the second embodiment performs the special view information setting process shown in FIG. 31 as in the first embodiment.
In this special drawing information setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the former half fluctuation pattern and the latter half fluctuation pattern are separately determined, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the former half fluctuation pattern and the latter half fluctuation pattern The variation pattern may be determined without separating the two.
Moreover, it is also possible to constitute so that the small hit frequent occurrence mode in which the probability that the above-mentioned small hit gaming state occurs is set to be high may be generated depending on the type of the stop symbol.

[Main processing]
The effect control device 300 of the second embodiment performs the main processing shown in FIG. 146 instead of the main processing shown in FIG.
The main process of the second embodiment is that the main effect zone setting process (step C22) is performed between the stage change control process (step C12) and the random number update process (step C13). Different from processing.

[Effect point control processing]
The effect control device 300 of the second embodiment performs effect point control processing shown in FIG. 147 instead of the effect point control processing shown in FIG.
In the effect point control process of the second embodiment, a process (steps C109 and C110) regarding whether or not the number of acquired points has become a bonus target value, and whether the fluctuation stop state of the decorative special view fluctuation display game continues for 10 seconds. The main process of the first embodiment is that the process (steps C113 and C114) on whether or not it is determined not to shift to the specific effect zone (described later) is performed between the process (steps C111 and C112) relating to It is different from

Specifically, in the process regarding whether or not it is determined that the transition to the specific effect zone is not made, first, it is determined whether or not the transition to the specific effect zone is determined (step C113).
If it is determined in step C113 that transition to the specific effect zone is determined (step C113; N), the process proceeds to step C111.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C113 that it is determined not to shift to the specific effect zone (step C113; Y), the corresponding bonus points (20 points in the present embodiment) are added to the number of points (Step C114) It transfers to the process of step C111. In this embodiment, in the specific effect zone setting process (FIG. 148) described later, when it is determined that the specific effect zone transition lottery is not won (step C1008; N), or it is not the suspension information that can be transferred to the specific effect zone When it is determined (step C1009; N), it is determined that it is determined not to shift to the specific effect zone.

[Specific effect zone setting process]
Next, details of the specific effect zone setting process (step C22) in the main process described above will be described. The specific effect zone control is shifted from the normal mode (normal display mode) to the specific effect zone to perform effects specific to the specific effect zone (specific effect) by the “specific effect zone control” described later. Settings for transitioning from the normal mode to the specific effect zone and settings for returning from the specific effect zone to the normal mode are performed.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the specific effect zone setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the specific effect zone in flag is set (step C1001).
If it is determined in step C1001 that the flag in the specific effect zone is not set (step C1001; N), the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure start memories) is the upper limit number (in the case of this embodiment, 8). ) Is determined (step C1002).
When it is determined in step C1002 that the number of special map reservations has not reached the upper limit number (step C1002; N), the specific effect zone setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C1002 that the number of special map reservations has reached the upper limit number (step C1002; Y), the suspension information is checked (step C1003), and the reach occurrence is suspended within the special image suspension. In other words, it is determined whether or not there is start storage of the special view variation display game accompanied with reach effect (step C1004).

If it is determined in step C1004 that there is a reach occurrence hold in the special view hold (step C1004; Y), a zone effect lottery table is set when the reach occurrence hold is present (step C1005), and the table is used. A specific effect zone shift lottery is performed (step C1007), and it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won (step C1008).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C1004 that there is no reach occurrence suspension within the special view suspension (step C1004; N), a zone effect lottery table when there is no reach occurrence suspension is set (step C1006), The specific effect zone transition lottery is performed using (step C1007), and it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won (step C1008).

In this embodiment, since the winning probability of the specific effect zone transition lottery is different between when there is no reach occurrence suspension and when there is reach occurrence suspension, different zone effect lottery tables are different when there is no reach occurrence suspension and when there is reach occurrence suspension. It is set.
Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), the winning probability of the specific effect zone transition lottery is 30/100 when there is no reach occurrence hold, and when there is a reach occurrence hold. It is 70/100.

If it is determined in step C1008 that the specific effect zone transition lottery is not won (step C1008; N), the specific effect zone setting process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C1008 that the specific effect zone transfer lottery is won (step C1008; Y), it is determined whether the on-hold information checked in step C1003 is the on-hold information that can be transferred to the specific effect zone (Step C1009).
If it is determined in step C1009 that the on-hold information is not transferable to the specific effect zone (step C1009; N), the specific effect zone setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C1009 that the on-hold information can be shifted to the specific effect zone (step C1009; Y), a flag in the specific effect zone is set (step C1010). By setting the flag in the specific effect zone in step C1010, the next special image variation display game is shifted to the specific effect zone.

In the present embodiment, the special order with the earliest digest order is the big hit with a big hit (that is, the special feature start memory where the result is a big hit) and the revolutionary mode rushing with hold (that is, rushing to a high expectation revolutionary mode). In the case where it is not any of the start-up memory of the special view variation display game, and the color of the decorative special view start-up display displayed on the display device 41 is either pink or blue, the specific effect zone It is determined that the hold information can be transferred to In addition, although the color of this special view starting memory display is set based on the judgment result at the time of starting winning a prize, it grows until the variable display game based on the starting memory where the color concerned is set is executed A pattern (for example, the color set as the final display color is red, but the first displayed color is blue, and the pattern changing from blue to green, red, etc.) is also included, in that case Even in the case where it is blue at the timing when it is determined whether it is the hold information that can be transferred to the specific effect zone, it is configured to determine that the hold information can be transferred to the specific effect zone.
Hereinafter, it is referred to as "growth" that the color of the corresponding decorative special drawing start memory display (see FIG. 149 (a)) changes to a color with a higher degree of expectation.
Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display has a default color according to the prefetch result etc. of the special figure hold corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display. (In the case of this embodiment, it may be displayed in a color (blue, green, red or gold in the case of this embodiment) different from (pink). The degree of expectation is higher in the order of pink <blue <green <red <gold.

Next, based on the hold information checked in step C1003, the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone, that is, the number of times of the special figure variation display game executed in the specific effect zone is set (step C1011).
In the present embodiment, when there is a reach occurrence hold, a big hit hold, or a revolution mode rush hold within the special view hold excluding the earliest special view hold, the special view fluctuation display based on the hold is the order of digestion. The number of times of staying in the specific effect zone is set so that the specific effect zone ends before the game is executed. Specifically, for example, when the hold is the fourth hold, the maximum number of times that can be set as the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone is three. The maximum number of times may be set as the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone, or the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone may be determined and set within the range of the maximum number of times by lottery or the like. As described above, when there is a reach occurrence hold, a big hit hold, or a revolution mode rush hold within the special view hold excluding the earliest special view hold, the special view fluctuation display game based on the hold By configuring the specific effect zone to end before execution of the game, expectations for the occurrence of gaming events (in the case of the present embodiment, reach occurrence, big hit occurrence, revolutionary mode occurrence) remain due to the end of the specific effect zone. Therefore, even if the specific effect zone ends, the player's interest continues.
In addition, if there is neither reach occurrence hold, big hit hold, nor revolution mode rush hold within the special drawing hold except for the first special drawing hold, the number of times to stay in the special effect zone is determined by lottery etc. Set

Next, display setting of the specific effect zone is performed (step C1012), display setting of the hold display mode dedicated to the specific effect zone is performed (step C1013), and the specific effect zone setting process is ended.
By performing display setting of the specific effect zone in step C1012, the background image or the like is switched to the background image or the like dedicated to the specific effect zone from the next special image variation display game.
In addition, by performing display setting of the reserved display mode exclusively for the specific effect zone in step C1013, from the next special figure fluctuation display game, the undigested start memory display area R1 and the corresponding variable start memory display area (digestion start memory display area Region) The decorative special drawing start memory display displayed in the area R3 is switched to the decorative special drawing start memory display (in the case of the present embodiment, the rice ball holding display) dedicated to the specific effect zone.

If it is determined in step C1001 that the flag in the specific effect zone is set (step C1001; Y), it is determined whether the variation of the special figure variation display game being executed is ended (step C1014).
If it is determined in step C1014 that the variation end time of the special figure variation display game in progress is not ended (step C1014; N), the specific effect zone setting process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C1014 that the variation of the special figure variation display game in progress is over (step C1014; Y), the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone is updated by -1 (step C1015). It is determined whether the effect zone stay number is 0 (step C1016).

When it is determined in step C1016 that the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone is not 0 (step C1016; N), the specific effect zone setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C1016 that the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone is 0 (step C1016; Y), the flag in the specific effect zone is cleared and display end setting of the specific effect zone is performed (step C1017) ). By clearing the flag in the specific effect zone, the next special figure variation display game is returned to the normal mode.
Next, the hold information is checked, the display setting of the hold display mode is performed based on the checked hold information (information in the special figure hold) (step C1018), and the specific effect zone setting process is ended.

By performing the display end setting of the specific effect zone in step C1017, the background image etc. starts from the next special image variation display game, the background image etc before moving to the specific effect zone (that is, the background image etc. dedicated to the normal mode) Return to
In addition, when the special effect zone ends, the decoration special figure starting memory indication returns to the decoration special figure starting memory indication for the normal mode (in the case of this embodiment, the peach hold indication), but depending on the information in the special figure holding, Even if the special effect zone ends, it does not return to the decoration special drawing start memory display only for the normal mode (that is, it continues to be displayed with the decorative special figure start memory display only for the specific effect zone), or the special effect zone ends Then, the color of the decoration special drawing starting memory may change to a color having a higher degree of expectation than the color before the transition to the specific effect zone. Therefore, in step C1018, display setting of the hold display mode is performed based on the hold information.

Here, in the present embodiment, when there is a reach occurrence hold, a big hit hold, or a revolution mode rush hold within the special view hold excluding the first special view hold, the digest order is based on the special hold based on the hold. The specific effect zone is finished before the execution of the figure variation display game. This is because the reach occurrence hold, the big hit hold, and the revolutionary mode rush hold have a high probability of growth as described above compared with other special view hold, and the player is made to visually recognize the growth. As a result, not only can the player have a sense of expectation by transitioning to the specific effect zone or continuation of the specific effect zone, but the player is expected to also have growth of the special view reserve after the specific effect zone has ended. It becomes possible to give a feeling.
Hereinafter, a special figure hold with high growth probability (in the case of this embodiment, a reach generation hold, a big hit hold, and a revolutionary mode rush hold) is referred to as a “specific hold”.

[Change production setting process]
The effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment performs the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 107 as in the first embodiment.
In the fluctuation effect setting process, the effect control device 300 sets the first half advance distribution group address table corresponding to the effect mode or the like in steps C812 and C814, and the second half advance distribution group corresponding to the effect mode or the like in step C817. Although the address table is set, it can be determined whether or not the decoration special view variation display game to be executed this time is a game in the specific effect zone based on the effect mode. Therefore, when the decoration special view variation display game to be executed this time is a game in the specific effect zone, the first half advance distribution group address table and the second half advance distribution group address table dedicated to the specific effect zone are set. Thereby, over the fluctuation for the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone, the effect dedicated to the specific effect zone (a character image dedicated to the specific effect zone or a speech image etc. is displayed, or the BGM for the specific effect zone flows, etc.) Is done.

[Specific effect zone control]
Next, “specific effect zone control” which is the feature of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
The effect control device 300 moves to the “rice ball zone” which is a specific effect zone, when the special drawing reserve number reaches the upper limit number (eight in the case of the present embodiment) and the specific effect zone transfer condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute an effect (specific effect) dedicated to the specific effect zone.
In the present embodiment, the case where the specific effect zone transfer condition is satisfied is all the two conditions that <1> the specific effect zone transfer lottery is won, and <2> the hold information that can be transferred to the specific effect zone. The case is satisfied (ie, in the case of step C1009 of FIG. 148; Y).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 can select “effect pattern 1”, “effect pattern 2”, or “effect pattern 3” as the effect pattern of the specific effect.
"Effective pattern 1" is a target special figure change display game when the specific effect zone does not end, that is, when the specific effect zone continues in the next special view change display game of the target special view change display game It is selected. On the other hand, “rendering pattern 2” and “rendering pattern 3” are selected when the specific effect zone ends in the target figure variable display game.
Therefore, for example, when the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone is n times, “effect pattern 1” is selected until the n−1th time, and “effect pattern 2” or “effect pattern 3” is selected at the nth time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (a), the "effect pattern 1" is a pattern in which the contents of the rice ball are not known. In addition, in the example shown in the example shown in FIG. 150 (a), the words that appear in the second half of the effect of “effect pattern 1”, the words that appear to notify the result that the contents of the rice ball are unknown. ") May be changed as the stage progresses (that is, whenever the special figure variation display game is executed in the specific effect zone). In addition, as the stage progresses, a different character (for example, a character as shown in FIG. 150 (b)) may be made to appear. At this time, an expectation is set for a plurality of different characters, and when there is a specific hold in the special view hold, the player is expected to feel a sense of expectation by selecting a character to appear according to the expectation. However, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation by the background or words.
In addition, you may provide patterns other than "rendering pattern 1" as an effect pattern (pattern which does not understand the content of a rice ball) which can be selected when a specific effect zone does not complete | finish in the special figure fluctuation display game used as object.

"The effect pattern 2" is a salted rice ball pattern without the content of the rice ball as shown in FIG. 150 (c), and the "effect pattern 3" has the content of the rice ball as shown in Fig. 151 (a) It is a filled rice ball pattern.
It is determined by the effect pattern lottery whether to select “effect pattern 2” or “effect pattern 3”. In the case of the present embodiment, it can be suggested that the expectation in the special view reservation is low by the effect of the “reproduction pattern 2”, and the expectation in the special view reservation is high by the effect of the “reproduction pattern 3” It can be suggested that the probability of winning in "rendering pattern 3" in the effect pattern lottery is set to be higher as the degree of expectation in the special figure reservation is higher. Here, "the degree of expectation in the special view hold is low" means, for example, when there is no specific hold in the special view hold or when the specific hold in the special view hold is the specific hold with a low degree of expectation is there. Further, "the expectation degree in the special-image hold is high" is, for example, the case where the specific hold in the special-image hold is the high-specified-order specific hold.
As shown in FIG. 151 (b), the contents of the rice ball that appear in the effect of “Demonstration Pattern 3” are the contents of a plurality of types (in the case of this embodiment, how much, Mita Mayo, Tsunamayo, Tsuji, Kelp, and Umeboshi) It is selected according to the degree of expectation in the Tokusou reserve from among. The degree of expectation is set to decrease in the following order: how much> Mayuta Mayo>Tunamayo>鮭>kelp> dried plum.

In the present embodiment, the number of stay in the specific effect zone is set, but it is also possible to configure so as not to set the number of stay in the specific effect zone.
When the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone is not set, an effect pattern of an effect to be executed in the target figure variation display game using, for example, the effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 149 (c) or FIG. 149 (d) Choose Then, when “reproduction pattern 1” is selected, the special effect variation display game targeted does not end the specific effect zone, but becomes “targeted” when “reproduction pattern 2” or “reproduction pattern 3” is selected. The special effect zone is ended in the special view variable display game.
In this case, only one of the effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 149 (c) and the effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 149 (d) may be stored, and the stored table may be used. Both may be stored and it may be determined by lottery or the like.

Here, “super-shortened fluctuation” in the table shown in FIG. 149 (c) is fluctuation whose fluctuation time is shorter than normal (for example, fluctuation time is 3.2 seconds fluctuation) Is set (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper limit number).
When the table shown in FIG. 149 (c) is used, in the case of "very short variation", the variation time is short, and the contents of the rice ball can not be sufficiently viewed, so "rendering pattern 1" is most easily selected , "Effect pattern 3" is not selected. On the other hand, in the case of "other than that (other than the extremely shortened variation)", the contents of the rice ball can be sufficiently viewed, so "reproduction pattern 3" is most easily selected, and "reproduction pattern 1" is not selected. It has become.

Also, in the case of using the table shown in FIG. 149 (d), when “specified with hold (specified with hold in special view hold)”, the player is allowed to visually recognize the growth of the specific hold (ie, specified In order to finish the effect zone earlier, "effect pattern 1" in which the specific effect zone continues is most difficult to be selected. On the other hand, in the case of "no specific hold (no special hold in special view hold)", the expectation in the special view hold is low, suggesting that the expectation in the special view hold is high. "Is not selected.
In addition, the selection probability of the effect pattern is made to differ depending on the type of specific hold in special view hold (in the case of this embodiment, whether it is reach occurrence hold, big hit hold or revolution mode rush hold). It is good.
In addition, the selection probability of the effect pattern may be made different depending on the expectation degree of the specific hold within the special view hold. Thus, for example, the higher the expectation of the specific hold within the special view hold is, the “display pattern 1” in order to cause the player to visually recognize the growth of the specific hold (that is, to end the specific effect zone earlier). It is possible to lower the selection probability of Moreover, it is also possible to increase the selection probability of “rendering pattern 3” which indicates that the expectation degree in the special-image hold is high as the expectation degree of the specific-hold in the special-image hold increases.
In addition, the selection probability of the effect pattern may be made different depending on whether or not there is a growth schedule reserve within the special view reserve. Thereby, for example, when there is a reserve of growth schedule in the special figure reserve, in order to make the player visually recognize the growth of the reserve (that is, in order to finish the specific effect zone earlier), “effect pattern 1” It is possible to lower the selection probability of
In addition, when there is a reserve of growth schedule in the special figure reserve, you may perform the production which indicates the growth in the specific production zone.

Display on the display device 41 when “specific effect zone control” is performed will be described using FIGS. 152 to 158.
FIG. 152 and FIG. 153 are diagrams showing an example of display when the special drawing reserve number reaches the upper limit number and the specific effect zone shift condition is satisfied.
FIG. 159 is a timing chart for describing an example when the specific effect zone shift condition is satisfied.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (d), points are added to the number of points every time when the variation display of the decorative feature variation display game is started.
Then, when the special figure reservation number reaches the upper limit number and the specific effect zone transition condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 152 (e) and FIG. 159 (A), with the start of the next decorative special figure variation display game Move to the special effect zone (rice ball zone).

In this example, it is assumed that “two times” is set as the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone. Therefore, in the specific effect zone 1 fluctuation, since the specific effect zone does not end at the first fluctuation, the effect of "effect pattern 1" is performed. In the case of the present embodiment, when the special drawing reserve number is the upper limit number, the over-shortened fluctuation occurs, so in the first special figure fluctuation display game after transitioning to the specific effect zone, as shown in FIG. As shown in 159 (A), zone entry effect is performed as an effect indicating that the specific effect zone is started. In the next specific effect zone second change (“first stage” in FIG. 159 (A)), the specific effect zone ends, so as shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and (b), “the effect pattern 2” As shown in FIG. 153 (d), (e), the effect of “effect pattern 3” is performed.
Then, when the specific effect zone ends, as shown in FIGS. 152 (c) and 152 (f), the mode returns to the normal mode.

The growth timing of suspension is set in advance, and a specific effect period (period in which the display mode is set as the specific effect zone) may be set to overlap with the growth timing.
If the reserve to grow in the special effect zone is not within the Tokusou reserve, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), when the mode is returned to the normal mode, the decorative special view starting memory display is also an ornament dedicated to the ordinary mode. Return to the special view start memory display.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153 (f), the decoration special view starting memory display is dedicated to the normal mode only when the normal mode is restored as shown in FIG. The color of the decoration special drawing starting memory display (the third holding in the example shown in FIG. 153 (f)) corresponding to the holding planned to grow is returned to the decoration special drawing starting memory display, but the color is returned to the normal mode At the same time (or at a predetermined timing after returning to the normal mode), the color changes to a color (red in the example shown in FIG. 153 (f)) having a higher degree of expectation than the color before the transition to the specific effect zone.
As described above, even if the specific effect zone ends, the expectation for the occurrence of the game event (in the case of the present embodiment, the reach occurrence, the big hit occurrence, the revolutionary mode occurrence) remains due to the growth of the hold after the specific effect zone ends. The player's interest continues.
Here, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153 (e), the hold added in the specific effect zone (the seventh hold in the example shown in FIG. 152 (e)) is dedicated to the normal mode only. It is comprised so that it may be displayed by the decoration special figure starting memory display.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a display when the special drawing reserve number has reached the upper limit number but the specific effect zone shift condition is not satisfied.
As shown in FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (d), points are added to the number of points every time when the variable display of the decorative feature game is displayed.
Then, when the special drawing reserve number has reached the upper limit number but the specific effect zone transfer lottery has not won, the specific effect zone transfer condition is not satisfied, as shown in FIG. 154 (d), point addition By performing display effects, as shown in FIG. 154 (e), bonus points (20 points in the case of the present embodiment) provided when the game does not shift to the specific effect zone are added to the number of points.

Also, as shown in FIG. 154 (f), although the number of special drawing reservations has reached the upper limit number, colors other than pink and blue are displayed in the decorative special drawing start memory display displayed on the display device 41 (FIG. In the example shown in 154 (f), even when there is a decoration special view start memory display of red), the specific effect zone transition condition is not satisfied, so point addition display effect is performed and it is given when it does not move to the specific effect zone Bonus points (20 points in the case of this embodiment) are added to the number of points.
In the example shown in FIGS. 154 (d) and (f), as the point addition display effect, the display effect is executed such that the decoration special drawing start storage display reaching the upper limit number affects the point addition. .

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of display when the decoration special drawing start memory display dedicated to the specific effect zone is continuously displayed even when the specific effect zone is ended.
In the present embodiment, the hold display continuation lottery is performed, and when the hold display continuation lottery is won, the decoration special view start memory display dedicated to the specific effect zone is displayed even when the specific effect zone ends (in the case of the present embodiment , It is configured to perform an effect of continuing to display a rice ball pending display). For example, the probability of winning the hold display continuation lottery is higher in the case where there is a specific hold in the special view hold than in the case where there is no specific hold in the special view hold. It should be noted that the effect of continuing to display the decoration special view start memory display only for the specific effect zone without performing the hold display continuation lottery may be performed as a confirmed effect, and may be performed only when there is a big hit hold within the special view hold. Based on the information of the special view reserve generated after the start of the specific effect zone, it may be determined whether the effect of continuing to display the decorative special view start memory display dedicated to the specific effect zone is to be performed.

  Specifically, for example, the hold display continuation lottery is performed at the time of setting to shift to the specific effect zone. When the on-hold display continuation lottery is won, as shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and (b), the effect of “rendering pattern 3” (or “rendering pattern 2” may be performed) is performed as shown in FIG. As shown in), even if the specific effect zone ends and returns to the normal mode, the decoration special drawing start memory display for the specific effect zone continues to be displayed until the target retention is absorbed. In this example, the reach generation hold is the target hold, and as shown in FIGS. 155 (d) to (f), the decoration dedicated to the specific effect zone is continued until the special view variable display game based on the reach generation hold is ended. The special view start memory display continues to be displayed.

As described above, the decoration special view start memory display dedicated to the specific effect zone continues to be displayed even after the end of the specific effect zone, so that even if the specific effect zone ends, a game event occurs (in the case of the present embodiment, reach occurrence, The player's interest continues because it can indicate that the expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot and the revolution mode remains.
In the example shown in FIG. 155, all of the decorative special drawing start memory display is continuously displayed by the decorative special drawing start memory display dedicated to the specific effect zone, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the is finished, the display is returned to the decoration special view start storage display for the normal mode only, except for the decoration special drawing start storage display corresponding to the target hold, and only the decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the target hold is for the specific effect zone. You may continue to display in the decoration special view start memory display, or if the special display mode is provided in the decoration special view start memory display dedicated to the specific effect zone, and there is a specific hold in the special view hold, the specific effect zone When the display mode of the decoration special view start memory display only for the specific effect zone is changed to the special display mode when the mode is returned to the normal mode so that the player feels the expectation of the player without clarifying the target Also good.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of a display when the hold grows in the specific effect zone.
In the present embodiment, when there is a reservation to grow in the specific effect zone, the holding growth lottery is performed, and when the holding growth lottery is not won in the specific effect zone, the target is displayed after the termination of the specific effect zone. The reserve is grown (see FIGS. 153 (d) to (f)). In addition, when winning in the holding growth lottery in the specific effect zone, it is configured to perform the effect of growing the target holding in the specific effect zone. For example, the probability of winning the hold growth drawing is higher in the case where there is a specific hold in the special view hold than in the case where there is no specific hold in the special view hold.

  Specifically, for example, the on-hold growth lottery is performed at the time of selection setting of the effect pattern. If the player does not win the hold growth lottery, as shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), the target hold does not grow (that is, the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the target hold does not change). When the on-hold growth lottery is won, as shown in FIGS. 156 (c) to (e), the on-target suspension grows (that is, the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the on-target suspension changes). In this example, the second hold in FIGS. 156 (d) and 156 (e) is the target hold, and the decorative special view start memory display corresponding to the target hold changes according to the degree of expectation of the target hold. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (f), even when returning to the normal mode, the growth of the target suspension is taken over, and the decorative special view start memory display corresponding to the target suspension is expected more than the color before the transition to the specific effect zone. It is displayed in high color (in this example, green).
In this manner, the player's sense of expectation can be improved in the specific effect zone by the growth of the hold in the specific effect zone. Furthermore, even after returning to the normal mode, by taking over the growth of the hold, expectations for the occurrence of gaming events (in the case of this embodiment, reach occurrence, big hit occurrence, revolution mode occurrence) remain even after the specific effect zone ends. The player's interest continues because it can indicate that.

In addition, if the target hold is planned to grow further, the target hold is grown in the specific effect zone (for example, the contents of the rice ball of the decoration special view starting memory display corresponding to the target hold are made more highly expectant) It may be changed, or after returning to the normal mode, the target hold may be grown (for example, the color of the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the target hold may be changed to a color with higher expectation) You may
Also, in the example shown in FIG. 156, when the mode is returned to the normal mode, the decoration special drawing start memory display (in the case of the present embodiment, the peach hold display) is returned to the normal mode only to take over the growth of the target hold. Even when returning to the normal mode, the growth of the target hold may be taken over with the decoration special view start memory display (in the case of this embodiment, the rice ball hold display) dedicated to the specific effect zone.
In addition, when it is determined that there is a hold of the growth schedule when referring to the hold information to determine whether or not to enter the specific effect zone, the holding growth lottery is performed at that timing, and a plurality of specific play zones are performed. The on-hold growth effect may be performed over the variable display game. In this case, the effect of growing the hold by the cut-in of the plurality of characters described above and the change of the speech is performed.

FIGS. 157 and 158 are diagrams showing an example of display when entering a revolution mode.
As shown in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (d), points are added to the number of points every time when the variable display of the decorative special game variable display game is started.
Then, when the special figure reservation number reaches the upper limit number and the specific effect zone transition condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 157 (e) and FIG. 159 (B), with the start of the next decorative special figure variation display game Move to the special effect zone (rice ball zone). In this example, it is assumed that the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the sixth hold in FIG. 157 (d) is the prefetched decoration special view start memory display H8 corresponding to the revolution mode entry hold.

Further, in this example, it is assumed that “four times” is set as the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone. Therefore, in the specific effect zone 1 fluctuation, since the specific effect zone does not end at the first fluctuation, the effect of "effect pattern 1" is performed. In the case of the present embodiment, when the number of special drawing reservations is large, super-shortening fluctuation occurs, so in the first special drawing fluctuation display game after transitioning to the specific effect zone, FIG. 157 (e), (f) and FIG. As shown in (B), zone entry effect is performed as an effect indicating that the specific effect zone is started. As the specific effect zone ends in the fourth specific effect zone fluctuation (“third step” in FIG. 159 (B)) after that, “effect pattern 3” (as shown in FIGS. 158 (a) and (b)) Or, it may be "effect pattern 2".
Then, when the specific effect zone ends, as shown in FIGS. 158 (c) and (d), the mode returns to the normal mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (e), when the special view variable display game based on the revolutionary mode rush hold is started, as shown in FIG. 158 (f) and FIG. 159 (B), a revolutionary mode is entered.
In this way, when there is a specific hold in the special view hold, by configuring the specific effect zone to end before the execution of the special view variation display game based on the specific hold, by the end of the specific effect zone Since it can be suggested that the expectation for the occurrence of a game event (in the case of this embodiment, the occurrence of a reach, the occurrence of a big hit, the occurrence of a revolutionary mode) remains even after the specific effect zone ends, the player's interest continues.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, when the mode is returned to the normal mode, the decoration special drawing start memory display (in the case of the present embodiment, the peach hold display) is returned to the normal mode only. It is also possible to keep displaying the decoration special drawing start memory display (in the case of this embodiment, the rice ball hold display) dedicated to the specific effect zone.
Moreover, in this embodiment, in the special figure change display game based on the revolutionary mode rush hold, although it is configured to execute rush effect to the revolutionary mode, the present invention is not limited to this. When the special view variation display game is executed multiple times by the start of the special view variation display game based on the mode entry hold, a plurality of changes up to the special view variation display game based on the revolution mode entry hold It is also possible to configure to make a rush effect to a revolution mode over the special figure variation display game based on the above.

FIG. 160 is a view showing a modified example of “specific effect zone control”.
When the time when the number of to-be- reserved special drawings does not reach the upper limit continues for a predetermined time or more, the number of to-be- reserved special drawings may apparently reach the upper limit to shift to the specific effect zone.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (c), points are added to the number of points each time the variation display of the decorative feature variation display game is started.
Then, if the time during which the number of special drawing reservations does not reach the upper limit continues for a predetermined time or more, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), an image prompting a pressing operation on effect operation unit 550 is displayed on display device 41. . When the player performs a pressing operation according to the image, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), a predetermined point (100 points in this example) is subtracted from the number of points, and the decoration special view start memory display is displayed. Increase the number to make it appear that the number of Tokusou pending numbers reach the upper limit. Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), when the variation ends and the next decorative special feature variation display game starts, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the game shifts to a specific effect zone (rice ball zone). Do.

Here, when transitioning to the specific effect zone when the special drawing reserve number actually reaches the upper limit number, it moves to the specific effect zone and the first special drawing fluctuation display game becomes the ultra-shortened fluctuation, but the figure In the case shown in the example shown in 160 (ie, when the number of Tokusou reserve numbers has reached the upper limit number apparently, the transition to the special effect zone is actually made) Since it does not exist, the transition to the specific effect zone and the first special figure fluctuation display game does not become the extremely shortened fluctuation. In the present embodiment, the zone rush effect is performed instead of the effects of “effect pattern 1”, “effect pattern 2”, and “effect pattern 3” only in the case of the extremely shortening variation, so apparently the number of reserved special views When it transfers to a specific effect zone by having reached the upper limit number, it transfers to a specific effect zone, and "the effect pattern 1", "the effect pattern 2", "the effect pattern 3" in the first special figure fluctuation display game Perform the production of In addition, when it moves to a specific effect zone apparently when the number of special drawing reservations reaches the upper limit number, after performing the zone rush effect in the first special image fluctuation display game after moving to the specific effect zone, The effects of the effect pattern 1 "," effect pattern 2 ", and" effect pattern 3 "may be performed.
Further, in the present embodiment, apparently, the increased special drawing reserve is configured to be consumed by a pseudo-series effect or the like.

In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 160 (effect of transitioning to a specific effect zone by point consumption) can be applied not only to the case where the number of times the special drawing reserve number does not reach the upper limit continues for a predetermined time or more, but also to other cases. It is.
For example, it is also possible to perform transition effect to a specific effect zone by point consumption as a resurrection effect after ending the specific effect zone because there is a specific state suspension within the special view suspension.
In addition, although the number of special figure reservations has reached the upper limit number, it does not move to the specific effect zone because the specific effect zone transition condition is not satisfied, and the special figure hold added after that is the expected level It is also possible to perform transition effect to a specific effect zone by point consumption when it is a high hold and the special figure hold number does not reach the upper limit number by the addition.

FIG. 161 is a view showing a modified example of the display device.
As shown in FIG. 161, in addition to the main display device 41, a sub display device 141 may be provided. As shown in FIGS. 161 (a), (b) and (d), this sub-display device 141 substitutes the undigested start storage display area R1 and the variable start storage display area (digestion start storage display area) R3. , It is used to display a decoration special view start memory display, or to perform an effect dedicated to a specific effect mode as shown in FIG. 161 (c). Thereby, in the main display device 41, the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and in the sub display device 141, it is possible to perform an effect for each holding and digest.

  According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the "specified effect zone control" described above, the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning area (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the above and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a stop result of the variable display game results in a predetermined special result, Start-up winning means for extracting random numbers related to the execution of the variable display game based on winnings, and storing the right to execute the variable display game (starting memory) up to a predetermined upper limit number (8 in the case of this embodiment) Game control apparatus 100), predetermination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining the right of execution of the variable display game before the variable display game is executed, and the right of execution corresponding to the execution right Execution right display means (effect control device 300) for displaying an indication (decorative drawing start memory display) on a predetermined display unit (display device 41 or sub display device 141), and execution right stored in the start winning memory storage means The specific effect which can set the specific effect period (period in which the display mode is the specific effect zone) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect zone transition condition) when the number of the becomes the predetermined upper limit number And period setting means (effect control device 300). Then, the execution right display means changes the display mode of the execution right display from the normal display mode to a specific display mode different from the normal display mode at the start of the specific effect period (that is, the decoration mode dedicated to the normal mode) It is possible to change from the figure start storage display to the decoration special view start storage display for the specific effect zone) (see steps C1012 and C1013 in FIG. 148), and the determination result of the predetermination means (information in the special figure reserve) Based on the above, even when the specific effect period is ended, the specific display mode is taken over and displayed (that is, based on the information in the Tokusetsu reserve, with the end of the specific effect period, the decoration feature dedicated to the normal mode It is determined whether to return to the figure start memory display or to continue to display the decoration special view start memory display dedicated to the specific effect zone, and after the end of the specific effect period, It is possible to display the decorative Patent view start memory display) Te (see step C1018 in Figure 148).

Therefore, even if the specific effect period (period in which the display mode is the specific effect zone) ends, the display mode of the execution right display (decorative drawing start memory display) is maintained as the specific display mode without returning to the normal display mode. (In other words, when a special effect start display for a specific effect zone is kept displayed), the player's sense of expectation can be continued even when the specific effect period is over. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.
Moreover, if the number of execution rights (starting memory) does not reach the predetermined upper limit number, the specific effect period is not set (do not shift to the specific effect zone). Therefore, the player continues to fire the game balls in order to reach the predetermined upper limit number of execution rights (starting memory), thereby improving the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “specific effect zone control” described above, the specific effect period setting means (effect control device 300) is based on the judgment result of the prior judgment means (game control device 100). It is possible to configure to determine the end timing of the specific effect period (period in which the display mode is the specific effect zone).
Specifically, it is possible to configure to set the number of times of staying in the specific effect zone based on the determination result of the prior determination means (information in the special view reserve) (see step C1011 in FIG. 148).

By configuring in this manner, the specific effect period ends based on the determination result of the prior determination means, so that the player can continue to have interest even if the specific effect period ends.
Specifically, when it is determined that a predetermined game event (in the case of the present embodiment, a reach, a big hit, a revolution mode) occurs based on the determination result of the predetermination means, until the game event occurs. In addition, since the specific effect period can be ended, even when the specific effect period is over, the expectation for the occurrence of the game event remains. Therefore, since the player can have both a sense of discouragement and a sense of expectation by the end of the specific effect period, the player can continue to have an interest.
In addition, since the game event occurs after the specific effect period ends and is discouraged, the feeling of excitement for the occurrence of the game event can be improved compared to the case where the game event occurs without the end of the specific effect period. .

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “specified effect zone control” described above, the point giving means (the effect control device 300) for giving points to the player and the points given by the point giving means are defined. And a bonus providing unit (rendering control device 300) for providing the player with a predetermined bonus (in the case of the present embodiment, a change of the effect mode) based on reaching the number. And, the point granting means, the number of execution rights (starting memory) stored in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) has become a predetermined upper limit number (eight in the case of this embodiment), It is possible to constitute so that a predetermined point may be given, when a predetermined condition (specific rendering zone shift condition) is not satisfied (see steps C113 and C114 in FIG. 147).

  By configuring in this way, the number of execution rights (starting memory) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, but if the predetermined condition is not established, points are awarded, and the specific effect period does not start. Even so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game.

Here, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-135332 describes a gaming machine which stores starting memory based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning area and displays a holding mark corresponding to the starting memory on a display device. It is done. However, in such a gaming machine, the display mode of the hold mark is changed based on the pre-read result, and since the display mode of the hold mark does not change and can not be expected, the player lacks interest. Can not enhance the interest of
Also, conventionally, it is determined whether or not there is a specific hold in the special view hold by prefetching, and if there is a specific hold, it shifts to a specific effect zone and performs a special effect over the specific hold. It has been known. However, in such a gaming machine, when there is no specific hold in the special view hold, it does not shift to the specific effect zone, or even if it moves to the specific effect zone, the game ends with the specified number of times and the subsequent games Can not increase the interest of the game because they have no hope for it.

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment does not change the display mode of the holding mark (decorative drawing start memory display) based on the pre-reading result (judgment result of the prior judgment means), but to the specific effect zone Since the display mode of the hold mark is changed along with the shift of the hold mark, it is possible to have an expectation for the hold without the display mode of the hold mark changing, so it is interesting for the player and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
Furthermore, not only the interest is improved by the start of the specific effect zone (transition to the specific effect zone), but even if the specific effect zone ends, the game event occurs (in the case of this embodiment, reach occurrence, big hit occurrence, revolution) Since the expectation to the mode generation remains, the player can continue to have interest.

Specifically, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, by shifting to the specific effect zone, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation.
Furthermore, there may be a case in which the holding grows up after the end of the specific effect zone, and in this case, by the holding growing after the end of the specific effect zone, expectations for the occurrence of the game event remain even if the specific effect zone ends. Since this can be suggested, the player's sense of expectation can be continued even after the end of the specific effect zone (see FIGS. 152 and 153).
In addition, decoration special view starting memory indication for the specific effect zone may continue to be displayed even after the end of the specific effect zone, in this case, decoration special figure starting memory display for the specific effect zone is also after the end of the specific effect zone By continuing to be displayed, it can be suggested that the expectation for the occurrence of the game event remains even after the specific effect zone ends, so that the player's sense of expectation can be continued even after the specific effect zone has ended (see FIG. See 155).

In addition, there may be a case where the reserve grows in the specific effect zone, and even when returning to the normal mode, the growth of the reserve may be taken over. In this case, the player grows in the specific effect zone by the reserve growing in the specific effect zone The expectation of can be improved. Furthermore, by taking over the growth of the suspension even when returning to the normal mode, it can be suggested that the expectation for the occurrence of the game event remains even after the specific effect zone ends, so that the player's expectation is expected even after the specific effect zone ends. The feeling can be continued (see FIG. 156).
In addition, when there is a specific hold in the special view hold, the specific effect zone ends before the special view variable display game based on the specific hold, so the specific effect zone ends when the specific effect zone ends. However, even if the display mode of the decoration special view start memory display does not change because it can indicate that the expectation to the game event occurrence still remains (specifically, the hold grows after the end of the specific effect zone There is no, decoration special drawing start memory display only for the specific effect zone does not continue to be displayed even after the end of the specific effect zone, the hold does not grow in the specific effect zone, the hold grows in the specific effect zone Even if the growth is not taken over when returning to the normal mode, the player's sense of expectation can be continued even after the end of the specific effect zone (see FIGS. 157 and 158).

In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the LED of the winning device 90 may be made to emit light based on the pre-reading result.
In addition, the LED of the winning device 90 is caused to emit light in a color corresponding to the color of the target hold (the color of the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the target hold), and when the target hold grows, along with the growth. The light emission color may be changed. Furthermore, even when growing during fluctuation, a corresponding color change may be performed.
In addition, when there is a hold on which the target hold grows and the LED of the winning device 90 emits light in a color corresponding to the color of the target hold, a new hold occurs, and the new hold is also If it is a growing hold (ie, a hold that changes in color), in principle, the light emission in the color corresponding to the color of the previous hold (the target hold) is continued. After the target retention is digested, it may not emit light in the color corresponding to the new retention color, or may emit light in the corresponding color.
Also, in the normal gaming state, the color of the LED of the winning device 90 is changed corresponding to the reserved color of special figure 1 and special figure 2 which are alternately winning, but a state other than the normal gaming state (for example, When you win a prize in the winning device 90 (2nd start winning opening 97) during the hour), the color of the LED of the winning device 90 does not change corresponding to the reserved color of the special figure 2 It is also good, only the color of the LED on the side of Puden (the second start winning opening 97) may be changed.
In addition, even if precocious reading is performed based on the gaming ball that has won the winning device 90 during a definite change or during time saving, the LED of the winning device 90 may be made to emit light based on the prereading result, or it is not made to emit light. Also good.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines of 1 type 2 type mixed type The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use gaming balls, such as machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and sparrow ball gaming machines. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 30 game board 32 game area 36 1st starting winning a prize mouth (starting winning area)
37 Normal fluctuation winning device (Starting winning area, winning device)
37e Base member 37h Regulating member (decorative member)
90 winning device 91 front cover member (decor member)
93 base member 93a mirror surface portion 97 second starting winning opening (starting winning area)
41 Display Device (Display Unit)
100 gaming control device (start winning combination storage means, prior determination means)
141 Sub Display Device (Display Unit)
300 effect control device (execution right display means, specific effect period setting means, point giving means, benefit providing means)

Claims (3)

A game machine which executes a variable display game based on winning of a game ball in a start winning area, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when a stop result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined special result. ,
Start winning storage means for extracting random numbers related to the execution of the variable display game based on winning of the game ball in the start winning area, and storing the right to execute the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number;
A prior determination unit that determines the right to execute the variable display game before the variable display game is executed;
Production control means for displaying an effect display corresponding to the variable display game on a display device and displaying an execution right display corresponding to the execution right on a predetermined display unit of the display device;
Specific effect period setting means capable of setting a specific effect period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the number of execution rights stored in the start winning memory storage means reaches the predetermined upper limit number; Equipped with
The effect control means is
With the start of the specific effect period, it is possible to change the display mode of the effect display and the display mode of the execution right display from the normal display mode to a specific display mode different from the normal display mode.
Based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, when to terminate the specific effect period, for the effect display displays changed to the normal display mode, it takes over the particular display mode for the execution rights expression A game machine characterized by being capable of displaying The specific effect period setting means is
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein it is possible to determine an end timing of the specific effect period based on a determination result of the prior determination means. Point giving means for giving points to the player;
And a bonus providing means for offering a predetermined benefit to the player based on the points awarded by the point awarding means reaching a prescribed number.
The point giving means is
Although the number of execution rights stored in the start winning storage means has become the predetermined upper limit number, a predetermined point is awarded when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Or the gaming machine described in 2.